Home

PROFIBUS-DP Master Module User`s Manual

1. b System switching due to a DP Slave error The QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a error in communi z cation with a DP Slave 2 jas lu Control system Standby system S 3 Continues ne New standby system New control system a z Executes system e switching 5 fS E 2G as Bus terminator Bus terminator n Zz oo Communication E failure 9 E O a N DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 31 System Switching due to DP Slave Error To switch the systems due to an error in communication with a DP Slave specify the system switching target DP Slaves in the following buffer memory e System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 C gt Section 3 4 14 For the program example for setting the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 refer to Section 7 9 1 o Z O O Z 5 Le PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 33 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Asri 4 POINT 1 With a communication error identified in a system switching target DP Slave after system switching no system switching is performed even if a communication error occurs in another DP Slave To perform system switching again restore all of
2. Initial value 0000n 0 Normal including reserved temporary slave reservation and or not configured F stations 1 Diagnostic information detected z Le Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23057 5A11H 16 15 14 13 12 1111019 817 615 4 13 2 1 Each bit indicates z the n th DP Slave owe 23058 5A12x 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 lt 0 lt Lu 23059 5A13x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 wm aod 23060 5A14 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 gee wn 23061 5A15x 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 O i 23062 5A16x 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23063 5A1 7x 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 n 23064 5A18x 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Lu 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23064 5A18n are fixed to 0 re Figure 3 19 Each Station s Diagnostic Status Un G23057 to Un G23064 0 oO O f n 6 a Wk z9 Se Rg 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 32 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 33 MELSEC TA cries 4 Parameter setting status area Active station Un G23584 to Un G23591 Address DEC HEX 23584 5C20n 23
3. Tracking cable In the redundant system including redundant CPUs the same parameters are written to systems A control and B standby Parameters set in GX Configurator DP and GX Developer Figure 4 29 Redundant System Parameters 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA orie 2 System switching error System switching methods There are the following cases where system switching occurs by an error OVERVIEW Table4 8 System Switching Methods Method Reference Switching by system switching request from QJ71PB92V 2 a and 2 b in this section Switching by system switching request from other network module than QJ71PB92V System switching when a fault occurs in the control QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant system System System switching using GX Developer System switching by system switching instruction CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a System switching due to a QJ71PB92V error The QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a error that disables the system operation SPECIFICATIONS Control system Standby system 4 Continues communication New control system iz Error in New standby system oo0000 ooo0o0 ooo Executes system switching i o Z O O Z 5 ire
4. 1 Execute DES ES b15 to b8 b7 to 23808 5D00 00H Fixed See below Bit Description Initial value b0 Execution instruction of request instruction No 1 0 b1 Execution instruction of request instruction No 2 0 b2 Execution instruction of request instruction No 3 0 b3 Execution instruction of request instruction No 4 0 b4 Execution instruction of request instruction No 5 0 b5 Execution instruction of request instruction No 6 0 b6 Execution instruction of request instruction No 7 0 b7 Execution instruction of request instruction No 8 0 Figure 3 30 Acyclic Communication Request Execution Instruction Area Un G23808 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA orie 3 Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 This area stores the request acceptance status and request execution completion z status of acyclic communication gt fe Address DEC HEX b15 to b8 b7 to bO 25120 6220H See below See below Zz O The request acceptance status is stored lt 0 Not accepted o 1 Acceptance competed 5 z gt nO Bit Description Initial value bO Acceptance status of request instruction No 1 0 3 b1 Acceptance status of request instruction No 2 0 b2 Acceptance status of request instruction No 3 0 z b3
5. 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only RW Read write executable E POINT Do not write any data to System area Use prohibited Doing so may cause the PLC system to malfunction 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 20 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO o Z O q 9 M oa j FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 2 Local station information area The information of the local station QJ71PB92V is stored in this area 1 Local station error information area Un G23071 This area stores the error information of the local station QU71PB92V Table3 9 Local Station Error Information Area Un G23071 Stored Value Description 0000H Normal Other than 0000H Error Error code lt gt Section 9 4 6 POINT The information in the Local station error information area Un G23071 is not cleared even if the problem occurred on the QJ71PB92V has been solved To clear the Local station error information area Un G23071 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 2 Current operation mode area Un G2254 This area stores the current operation mode value Table3 10 Current Operation Mode Area Un G2254 Stored Value Descr
6. Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator 3 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o00000 ouon00 ouon0n 000000 ooonuou o0o0o00 ooo000 ouono0n ouou0u 000000 ooo0000 ooon00 o0o0000 ooo0o0 DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB Figure 4 30 System Switching due to QJ71PB92V Error PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 31 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY ceries The following lists the QJ71PB92V errors that may cause system switching Table4 9 Errors by Which System Switching Request is Automatically Generated Error Code Error Description E4E2u Hardware failure E5A1H F101H No DP Slaves are set to perform I O data exchange in the parameter settings F10En F10FH Hardware failure F1FFH An error has occurred during processing of system switching Standby system eee Control system 1 Systems are not switched when the power turns OFF and then ON or in Separate mode For details on the error codes refer to Section 9 4 eeeeeeevneeeeoeoeeeaoeoeeoeeoevseeeoeeeeeeeeoeneeeeeeaeeneeoeaeeeeeene eed 4 32 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries
7. QJ71PB92V RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN READY PRMSET 1 RSPERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F COO0O OO0000 p QJ71PB92V U Figure 5 3 QJ71PB92V Appearance Table5 2 Names of Parts No Name Description These LEDs indicate the operation status of the QJ71PB92V For details refer to 1 in this section 2 PROFIBUS interface connector This connector connects the PROFIBUS cable to the QJ71PB92V 1 Indicator LEDs 5 5 5 3 Part Names and Settings D PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSECE cance 1 Indicator LEDs a ed QJ71PB92V w RUN O OTEST SD RD O OTOKEN READY PRM SET RSP ERR O O FAULT Figure 5 4 Indicator LEDs z o Table5 3 Indicator LEDs Ei O LED Status Description Reference we RUN ON Normally operating OFF Hardware error watchdog timer error or power failure Section 9 1 ON CEEE E E E ii ee Section 4 1 1 i SDIRD Flashing xchanging ata or during acyclic communication Second zA OFF Not communicating with DP Slave or being in the standby system S re ON Ready to communicate or communication being performed 9 READY oO OFF Not ready to communicate or no communication ON A communication error has occurred Section 3 4 6 RSP ERR er OFF No communication error PESE Section 5 4 ON Executing self diagnostics or flash R
8. 10 Z e e I o wW l a 5 O E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries 9 5 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions This section explains how to return the QJ71PB92V to its factory set condition This procedure initializes the flash ROM of the QJU71PB92V Perform the following procedure for example when parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted The PRM SET LED is flashing 1 Stop the QCPU 2 Connect the GX Developer to the QCPU and perform the following steps a to k by using the Device test on the GX Developer a Write 9 to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V b Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 d Write F to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V e Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 f When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 g Write Ax to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V h Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 i When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 j The TEST LED tu
9. colitication time setting area I Hov KO a aie 1Sets conditions for system 2 switching O UO ee Q I r 1 Sets a system switching 5 nov HI G23649 Psiave ist m I roy He ee J Specifies the 2nd temporary j J slave reservation awd Zee TN a 193 In the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching the nk system from standby to control SM1518 the initial m E setting similar to the one for QJ71PB92V startup is m S a OE amp Figure 7 28 Initial Setting Too POINT A Zz To enable the system switching due to a DP Slave error immediately after system E switching store 0 in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area E W Un G2084 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from m standby to control SM1518 gt Figure 7 28 oa PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 67 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aerie 2 Keeping output data To keep output data after system switching perform the following e Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the control system Before system switching Write the output data to the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 using devices Tracking transfer the output data stored in the devices xoc __ ______________ BBLKWR uo K14336 D100 k96 Output data are written to Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 using devices Output data stored in the devices are tr
10. 1 0 CONFIGURATION DATA Information on I O configuration of a DP Slave I O data exchange This function allows I O data exchange between a DP Master Class 1 and DP Slaves Global control This function enables synchronization command transmission for I O data from a DP Master Class 1 to DP Slaves Diagnostic information Diagnostic information of PROFIBUS DP which is detected by a DP Master or notified by a DP Slave Diagnostic information specific to each DP Slave Extended diagnostic error information Each of DP Slaves notifies of it to the DP Master when an error is detected To the next page A 13 Term Bus cycle time Description PROFIBUS DP processing time for the DP Master to perform cyclic communication with each DP Slave FDT Field Device Tool A tool by which the following operations are performed to DP Slaves on the PROFIBUS DP via a DP Master e Writing or reading parameters of DP Slaves e Monitoring DP Slave status etc DTM Device Type Manager A file in which communication settings and DP Slave parameters are defined when FDT is used The DTM consists of CommDTM and DeviceDTM An abbreviation of Communication DTM CommDTM CommDTM is a file used to define the communication settings needed for transmission via a DP Master DeviceDTM Device DTM is a file in which parameters to be set for a DP Slave are defined ean A specific numb
11. 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23615 5C3Fu are fixed to 0 the n th DP Slave Figure 3 33 Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries When the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned ON the DP Slaves specified in the Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 become temporary slave reservation z i gt Temporary s ave reservation Specifies temporary slave reservation s o request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 ON OFF z Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON 5 aS l OFF Bo Data exchange start completed signal X00 Jg E RE N re Executes lt temporary slave N reservation 25 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 and Stores status data 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 Figure 3 34 Operation in Temporary Slave Reservation Request Area POINT 1 Set values in the Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 while the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored 2 Normal DP Slaves can be changed to Temporary slave reservations Changing Reserved stations DP Slaves set as
12. Bus terminator Bus terminator Figure 1 1 PROFIBUS DP Using QJ71PB92V Continued 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC KE eries 1 1 Features The following describes the features of the QJ71PB92V OVERVIEW 1 DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP The QJ71PB92V complies with IEC 61158 and operates as a DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP systems a Up to 125 DP Slaves are connectable Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling exchange of I O data up to 8192 bytes gt Section 4 1 1 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt o a Diagnostic information can be easily acquired Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slave during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O signals lt gt Section 4 1 2 SPECIFICATIONS O w Supporting the global control function By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available gt Section 4 1 3 Table1 1 Descriptions of Services This service is for synchronizing the output status of DP Slaves FUNCTIONS In the SYNC mode the output status of a DP Slave is refreshed STNG each time it receives the SYNC service While no SYNC service is received the output status is held
13. J y y DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave 5 modules PARAMETER SETTING Figure 2 3 When 125 DP Slaves are connected 41 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 4 When multiple DP Masters are connected Multi master system More than one DP Master with different FDL addresses can be connected to the same network PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 6 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE cries 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration This section explains configuration of a redundant PROFIBUS DP system in which the QJ71PB92Vs are mounted For the redundant system using the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 4 8 1 System equipment The following table shows the equipment required for the redundant PROFIBUS DP system Table2 4 System Equipment DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92 function version D or later lt _3 Section 2 4 Configuration tool GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later DP Slave Redundant or non redundant DP Slave QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater Required when 32 or more DP Slaves are connected PROFIBUS cable Bus terminator L Section 5 5 1 2 Network configuration To use the QJ71PB92V in a redundant PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following c
14. Time data Time data Time data DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 15 Time Data Read Request 2 Executing time control function Execute the time control function by the following procedure a Write request data to the Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 b Turn ON the Time control start request signal Y19 c When the time control is completed the execution result is stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and the Time control start response signal X19 turns ON d Check the execution result stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and turn OFF the Time control start response signal X19 For program examples on the time control function refer to the following e Single CPU system gt Section 7 6 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 6 4 18 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 4 Data Swap Function This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and received gt Use this function for DP Slaves whose word structure is different upper and lower bytes are reversed from that of the QJ71PB92V This function enables you to swap upper and lower bytes to exchange I O data without the n
15. Device Description Device Description D200 to a M100 to aa D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection 415 Acyclic communication request result area D3000 to A eyt Acyclic communication response area D3012 T 28 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 5 Program example PROGRAMMING 3 Program example Mo X26 D200 0 M108 nov M100 HOY MoV nov Pty nov Pp a i Hov D3000 D3000 nov UO HOA400 piei 25122 nov UO HOA400 H BoV G25122 UO G25120 H1400 K2 K16 KO Kl UO G23814 H1 UO 625121 D3001 HO D3001 K4M100 UO G23809 UO G23810 UO G23811 UO G23812 UO G23813 K123 UO G23808 D3000 K12 UO G23808 K4 Processing for failed completion nov HO UO G23808 MELSEC KE eries Reads the acceptance Ji status and completion status Request code is set 1400H The FDL address of the J target DP Slave is set FDL address 2 Data length is set 16 bytes bot Slot No is set 0 Index is set 1 Empty area 0 Executes Acyclic communication Request instruction No 1 is executed Reads the response code and error code Reads the execution result Acyclic communication completion processing Reads detailed error code Acyclic communicat
16. H L H Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 H l L L H L gt H Y I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 19 When Validating the Data Swap Setting 4 4 Data Swap Function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG cries 4 5 Data Consistency Function When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to buffer memory this function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed 1 I O data consistency function a The PROFIBUS DP bus cycle and QCPU sequence scan are performed asynchronously Because of this when the QCPU reads input data in the buffer memory during input data transfer from a DP Slave to the buffer memory the original data may be divided generating inconsistency in the input data The same applies to output data The following shows an example of data inconsistency when data are read from the QCPU during the input data transfer from a DP Slave to the buffer memory lt Before the data consistency function is used gt QJ71PB92V eeru Buffer memory DP Slave Updated area for data transferred from DP N Slave Read during Data transfer Not updated area for data data transfer in process transferred from DP Slave Figure 4 20 Example of Input Data Inconsistency b When the data consistency function is enabled it makes reading from the QCPU wait until data transfer fro
17. IRSP ERR ogo0 Stop mianitor Figure 9 2 H W Information Screen Table9 2 Values Displayed at H W LED Information Description The LED on the QJ71PB92V is OFF 0001 The LED on the QJ71PB92V is ON Displaying 0000 and 0001 alternately The LED on the QJ71PB92V is flashing 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions 9 3 10 Z e e I v wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA eries 9 2 Troubleshooting When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible The following shows the troubleshooting procedures when communications between the QJ71PB92V and DP Slaves are not possible Communication with DP Slave is not possible No Check the PROFIBUS cable connections L gt Section 5 5 Are PROFIBUS cables wired correctly Yes Is a bus terminator connected to the terminal station of the network Or is the specified bus terminator used No Check the bus terminator and connect it lt gt Section 5 5 1 Yes Is the PROFIBUS DP network configuration correct No of connected modules etc No Check the PROFIBUS network configuration gt Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Yes No Has each station connected to PROFIBUS DP been powered ON Power ON each station Yes H
18. OVERVIEW switched each other continuing communications lt 3 Section 4 8 Zz 5 b System switching is available when an error occurs in the QU71PB92V or in z communication with a DP Slave z0 m The systems can be switched when an error occurs in the QJ71PB92V or in 28 communication with a DP Slave e When the QJ71PB92V detects a critical error 2 A a Error in aig system Continues communication 2 QJ71PB92V New standby system New E system 3 Tracking A Bus terminator Bus terminator D 5 E O Zz R Quo Z 93 DP Slave QJ71PB93D om vaa 500 Figure 1 2 When the QJ71PB92V detects a critical error m 23 oEp P wW gt e When the QJ71PB92V detects a communication error of a DP Slave BO Control system a system 4 Continues communication S New standby system New es system Lx w g w E 5 Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator 0 zZ g oO g failure Figure 1 3 When the QJ71PB92V detects a communication error of a DP Slave ie Zz aQ Eo Q Bz 1 1 Features 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
19. 23321 5B19h 3 39 MELSEC TE eries 4 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 a This area stores the diagnostic information generated on DP Slaves during communication Information of 125 modules is stored in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 in the same order for each module b15 b8 b7 bO Diagnostic information area of 1st module The status 3 information Whether The FDL address of the st or not any extended diagnostic module is stored information other than the one sent initial value 00x Diagnostic information area of 2nd module this time is stored in the DP Slave In the normal status 00x is stored 23072 5A20x of the 1st module is stored 00x to 7Du 0 to 125 FDL address Diagnostic information area of 125th module Initial value 00H 00x Other extended diagnostic information exists 80H No other extended diagnostic information exists The status 1 information of the 1st The status 2 information of the 1st module is stored module is stored 23073 5A214 Initial value 00x Initial value 00H 00H Normal 00H Normal Other than 00H lt gt b Other than 00H lt 7 b Figure 3 25 Diagnostic Information Area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 POINT 1 Data are assigned to the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 in the order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in
20. 25504 63A0x 25505 63A1H to 25632 6420n 25633 6421n to 25760 64A0n 25761 64A1H to 25888 6520x 25889 6521n to 26016 65A0x 26017 65A1H to 26144 6620x Response area for request instruction No 1 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 2 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 3 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 4 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 5 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 6 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 7 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 8 Data size 128 words Figure 3 32 Acyclic Communication Response Area Un G25121 to Un G26144 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 4 11 Alarm area This area is used for the alarm acquisition ai x 3 1 Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 Set request data for alarm acquisition in this area Initial value O000H For the request format refer to Section 7 5 2 Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 Be The execution result of alarm acquisition is stored in this area Initial value 0000n as For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 5 25 3 4 12 Time control area This a
21. 2H 1 When E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 1 is stored 1 3 Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 3 3H 4 4H 1 When E403h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored _ 3 Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E403h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 3 is stored gt gt Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E403h is currently stored in offset address 0 0nH Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH T7 18 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE OVERVIEW 1 Request format Table7 18 Request Format Offset Address Description Set Value Set a request code 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE 0 0H Set value 1401H 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE Set value 1411H 1 In WRITE servic
22. Input data 00H to F4 Output data length length 22776 58F8n FDL address of 125th module unit byte unit byte 22777 58F9 1 O data length of 125th module FFu Input data not assigned FF Output data not assigned Figure 3 11 Address Information Area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 1 The difference between 00 and FF is as follows 00H means that input or output data are assigned with the data length set to 0 FFu shows that assigned input or output data do not exist 3 27 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 4 Input data start address area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the start address buffer memory address for each DP Slave s input data is stored in this area Creating a sequence program utilizng the Input data start address area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 allows address specification of the Input data area without consideration of the input points for each DP Slave Information of 125 modules is stored in the Input data start address area for mode 3 in the same order for each module OVERVIEW Address DEC HEX b15 b0 22784 5900 Input data start address of 1st module The start address buffer memory address of the CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 i f the 1 le i Initial value 22785 5901n Input data start address of
23. OFF am ann o zZ E m n aa W m zA Z 5 g fo Yn a ES Sz 0e Be 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T 3 PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY series c Parameter settings on GX Configurator DP lt Master parameters gt Master Settings Module QJ71PB92V Revision gt aAd Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION PROFIBUS Master The transmission speed is set Set the FDL address of the QJ71PB92V Head add PLC Set the I O No of the n QJ71PB92V Error action flag Upper 2 digits Min slave interval Polling timeout Data control time F Watchdog M Autom Refresh Watchdog for time sync jo o mazg 0x0 OFE F Goto Clear State jeo pi 65535 jo f e5535 foo fy 65535 F Consistency jo 0 65535 Cancel Default Bus Param lt Slave parameters gt Slave Parameter Settings Model BRKRKRRRKH Revision Vendor BERERERK free Slave Properties Name Set the FDL address of the DP Slave IV Watchdog min T_sdr Group identification number Set this for normal DP Slave DP Y1 support enabled Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory F Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master Cancel Default User Param Select Modules lt Input CPU Device Output CPU Device Slave_Nr_001 FDL Address fi 0 125 Slave Watchdog time 5 1 65025 10ms ji 1 255 O Gpl l Gp2 l Gp3 l Gp4 l Gp5 l Gpe l Gp O Gps F Sync Output I Freeze Input i arer I O d
24. Slave its output can be held Example Watchdog timer setting example for QJ71PB93D Slave Parameter Settings Model Qu71PBS3D Revision Vendor O 3 Slave Propetties Name Slave_Nr_001 FDL Address 125 0 125 Uncheck the box min T_sdr 1 1 255 Group identification number I Gpl F Gp2 l Gp3 I Gp4 l Gp5 1 Gp6 l Gp7 M Gps M Active I Syne Output I Freeze Input E I Swap I O Bytes in Master ok Cancel Defaut User Param Select Modules Set the Clear Hold setting for output data to Hold for the DP Slave Output data can be held with the DP Slave s watchdog timer enabled Example Hold Clear setting of output Data for ST1Y2 TE2 Set it to Hold nnwy D7 a ASTI Y2 1E2 2424 t nie OE cae teran EJPOINT Whether or not output data are output from each DP Slave to external devices after stop of I O data exchange differs depending on the DP Slave setting For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries c Precautions on the GX Configurator DP side 1 When using Slave list The monitoring target is the QJ71PB92V which is mounted on the same base as the redundant CPU where GX Configurator DP is connected by RS 232 5 cable USB cable etc 2 When using Current Configuration The monitoring target is the QJ71PB92V which is mounted on the same base as the redu
25. Y0O8 Use prohibited O Yo09 Use prohibited oO Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible To the next page Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 8 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D TableApp 6 Output Signal Comparisons Continued Signal name QJ71PB92D Compa tibility QJ71PB92V M ELSEG seres Replacement precautions YOA Use prohibited O YOB Use prohibited O Data consistency start Dedicated instruction valid request signal signal ON Data consistency ON Data consistency by dedicated by dedicated voc instruction instruction Use prohibited m o enabled enabled OFF Data consistency OFF Data consistency by dedicated by dedicated instruction instruction disabled disabled Restart request signal YOD ON Restart request O OFF YOE Use prohibited oO YOF Use prohibited Y10 Use prohibited O Operation mode change request signal Y11 ON Operation mode change O OFF Y12 Use prohibited O Walls Use prohibited O Y14 Use prohibited O Wald Use prohibited oO Y16 Use prohibited O Yi Use prohibited O Alarm read request signal Y18 ON Alarm read request Use prohibited oO OFF Time control start request signal I9 ON Time contr
26. _ 48004 to 57FFn Inc icati d de 3 thi i 22528 to 22777 Address information area n Communication Mode mode 3 this area is Section used to store the FDL address of each DP FFFFH R 58004 to 58F9x for mode 3 3 4 4 Slave and I O data length 22778 to 22783 System area Use prohibited 58FAux to 58FFH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 2 u r i 22784 to 22908 Input data start address area Section used to store the start address buffer memory 0 R 59004 to 597Cx for mode 3 3 4 4 address of the input data of each DP Slave 22909 to 22911 System area Use prohibited 597Du to 597FH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is utpu r r i 22912 to 23036 Output data start address area Section used to store the start address buffer memory 0 R 59804 to 59FCn for mode 3 3 4 4 address of the output data of each DP Slave 23037 to 23039 System area Use prohibited 59FDu to 59FFu 23040 to 23047 Slave status area Normal This area stores the communication status of Section 0 R 5A00x to 5A07H communication detection each DP Slave 3 4 5 23048 to 23055 Slave status area Reserved This area stores the reserved or temporary 0 R Section 5A08x to 5A0F station setting status slave reservation setting of each DP Slave 3 4 5 23056 to 23064 Slave status area Diagnostic This area stores the diagnostic information Section g g 0 R 5A10x to 5A18x information detection generation stat
27. iw a j FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 22 3 4 2 Local station information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 4 3 Operation mode change area This area is used to change the operation mode of the local station QU71PB92V For changing the operation mode refer to Section 6 2 1 Operation mode change request area Un G2255 For execution of the operation mode change request set a desired operation mode Initial value FFFEn The initial value FFFEu is used for malfunction prevention If the Operation mode change request signal Y11 is turned ON with the initial value stored in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 E300 is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and the operation mode is not changed Table3 13 Operation Mode Change Request Area Un G2255 Set Value Description 0001H The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode 0002H The mode is changed to Self diagnostics mode 0003H The mode is changed to Communication mode mode 3 0009H The mode is changed to Flash ROM clear mode 0101H The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode The Parameter setting mode is registered to the flash ROM at the same time as the operation mode change 0103H The mode is changed to Communication mode mode 3 The Commun
28. oa wa Timing for turning ON an output signal of the QJ71PB92V Do not turn ON any output signal of the QJ71PB92V in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 No processing is performed CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt O Me When using ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 Use of a rise execution instruction is not allowed Example MOVP PLS etc SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 69 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples I O data exchange can be continued after system switching This section explains program examples for continuing I O data exchange in the case of system switching The following system configuration is used as an example for explanations in Sections 7 9 1 to 7 9 7 1 System configuration example Q25PRHCPU QU71PB92V aa QX41 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave Figure 7 31 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange When Mounted on a Redundant System 1 Modules are installed in order from slo
29. 1 In Debug mode setting of Redundant parameter in GX Developer select Start with Debug mode 2 Write the configured redundant parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 3 Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Perform self diagnostics on the QU71PB92Vs in systems A and B Ea Section 5 4 Set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Backup mode 1 In Debug mode setting of Redundant parameter in GX Developer Cselect Do not start with Debug mode 2 Write the configured redundant parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 3 Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON Ea QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 7 2 Set PROFIBUS DP parameters in GX Configurator DP j K Section 6 1 y Set the standby master FDL address in GX Developer j sac O Section 6 7 v Connect PROFIBUS cables to the QJ71PB92Vs in systems Aand B C Section 5 5 Connect PROFIBUS cables to DP Slaves and boot them gt Manual for DP Slave Set the RUN STOP switches of the redundant CPUs in systems A and B to RUN Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON 1 To the next page Figure 5 2 Procedures before System Operation Redundant System 5 3 5 2 Pro
30. 5 Precautions for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system This section explains precautions for the case where the QJ71PB92Vs are mounted to a redundant PROFIBUS DP system a Precautions on the QJ71PB92V side 1 Function version of the QJ71PB92V Use the QJ71PB92V of function version D or later gt Section 2 4 2 Version of GX Developer Use GX Developer of Version 8 17T or later 1 gt Section 2 1 3 When starting up the redundant system Check the Local station error information area Un G23071 to see if the QJ71PB92V has an error or not gt Section 3 4 2 If an error exists remove the error cause When an error exists system switching is not executed 4 Continuation of each function of the QU71PB92V For precautions for continuing each function of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 7 9 7 5 When system switching occurred Do not perform the following before the system switching is completed e Turning off the power of the new control system e Resetting the redundant CPU on the new control system If either of these is performed before completion of the system switching DP Slave outputs may turn off momentarily Confirm that the system switching is completed before doing the above operations Completion of the system switching can be confirmed by either of the following methods Table4 12 Confirmation of system switching completion Item QJ71PB92V in new control system Communication READY signal X1B and Module
31. 50 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation ALLA coccccccccccccccccccccccccccecccccccscesccsscescescessceseescesseeseeee 3 51 3 4 14 Redundant system Areaercecccoccoccccooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 53 3 5 Processing Time COO COOOL OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOO SOO OO OOO OOOOO OOOO OOOOH OOSOO 3 58 3 5 1 Bus cycle time COOOL OOO COOOL OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO SOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OOOO SOO SOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOSOO 3 58 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 62 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system SOO COO OO OOOOH OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOS OO SOO OOOO SOO OOOOO COCO 3 64 CHAPTER4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to4 39 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions 0oocooocoooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 A 2 4 1 1 O data EXCHANGE seeeeecececcccccccccccccccscccccccvccscccccccoccscccoocssocsocsvccsocssccsocesosccccssonsooes A 2 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information sssessessessesccsecccsccccsccscesee 4 4 4 1 3 Global control function coooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 0000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 11 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves COCO
32. Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E545H Alarm ACK request error response actions E546H The slot number is incorrect Check if the alarm data returning ACK is stored in the E547H The sequence number is incorrect Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un 26768 and retry E550H Physical execution error was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E551H Execution error on the protocol was detected corrective actions E552H Execution error on the application was detected E560H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side CEEI ca desea ihebDPSI E561H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side PR ES SRE A PERERA ARNE E562 Modul Aceeed on Pe DESI id correctly set or not and retry H ee eee eee For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E563H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available 9 18 9 4 Error Codes To the next page 9 4 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA series Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E564H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side E565H Request not supported error was detected on the DP Slave side E566H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E567H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E568H Incorrect slot number
33. Head address on PLC o o 00 OFE g 7 Error action flag gt ar State Min slave interval a0 1 65535 Polling timeout 1 65535 Data control time 10 1 65595 g Watchdog m I Autom Refresh Consistency n ri Watchdog for time syne 0 65535 T Cancel pefout BusParam z Make sure the box is unchecked Figure 8 2 Data Consistency in Automatic Refresh 2 The BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions must be used in pair z Use the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions as a pair and always execute them once Z for every sequence scan 9 oO If only one of these instructions is used an error code is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 L gt Section 9 4 6 oe no aE zS Se OD az 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 8 2 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 MELSEC TA eries Execution timing Execute the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions all the time While the QJ71PB92V is implementing the data consistency function the dedicated instruction is not processed not executed gt Section 4 5 Therefore I O data may not be read or written in a program where either of the instructions is executed only once at the rising or falling edge of the pulse 4 When mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station 5 6 Dedicated instructions are not executable when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Transmission delay time when
34. PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 0 zZ im o pe mi w To the next page PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 13 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries Table6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Setting Items Continued Item Description Update Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Update Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Not checked Disables transmission of the Update Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Update Alarm Status Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Status Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Not checked Disables transmission of the Status Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Status Alarm Manufacturer Specific Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Not checked Disables transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm Diagnostic Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Not checked Disables transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm Process Alarm Check this checkbox
35. QJ71PB92V E402H The read data length is incorrect Check if the specified read data length is correct and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E403H Read error response actions E404H The slot number is incorrect Check if the specified slot number is correct and retry E405H The index is incorrect Check if the specified index is correct and retry P Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E406H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 to ee _ Start I O data exchange Class service of Acyclic communication was executed while A E407H Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in I O data exchange is stopped a the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions es Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in A physical execution error detected or system switching tas E410H f ae the Slave status area Normal communication detection occurred during service execution in the redundant system Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions E411H Execution error on the protocol was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E412H Execution error on the application was detected corrective actions E420H Re
36. READY signal X1D are ON RUN and READY LEDs are ON e RSP ERR and FAULT LEDs are OFF 6 Operations available for the QJ71PB92V in the standby system The following operations are available for the QJU71PB92V in the standby system when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode Input signals LEDs e Writing parameters by GX Configurator DP e Changing the operation mode gt Section 6 2 e Restarting the QJ71PB92V using the Restart request signal YOD IL Section 3 3 2 8 1 When the redundant CPU is in Backup mode GX Configurator DP automatically changes it to the Separate mode to write the parameters 4 36 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS b Precautions on the DP Slave side 1 Watchdog timer setting value MELSEC TE eries Set a watchdog timer value so that it satisfies the following formula If the formula is not satisfied a watchdog timer error occurs in DP Slaves during system switching System Configuration When using only non redundant DP Slaves When using redundant and non redundant DP Slaves Table4 13 Watchdog timer setting value Description Watchdog timer 2 Bus cycle time x 2 Redundant system switching time gt Section 3 5 1 3 5 3 Reference Section 2 3 2 1 Section 2 3 2 3 When using only redundant DP Slaves Line switching time of DP Slave For the line switching time for a DP Slave refer to the manual of the
37. Settings in GX Configurator DP To use the data consistency function by automatic refresh mark the Autom Refresh and Consistency checkboxes Master Settings Module QJ71PB92 Revision SAA Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 5Mbps 7 FDL address po o mg Head address on PLC foo 0x0 OFE Error action flag F Goto Clear State Min slave interval 80 1 65535 Polling timeout 50 1 65535 Data control time 100 1 65535 F Watchdog E Autom Refresh Consistency Watchdog for time syne 0 0 65535 10 ms Cancel Default Bus Param Figure 4 22 Automatic Refresh Setting GX Configurator DP For the automatic refresh setting method refer to Section 6 6 2 4 22 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries b Data consistency function by dedicated instructions Use the BBLKRD read and BBLKWR write instructions as dedicated instructions for reading writing QJ71PB92V buffer memory to execute the data consistency function For details on dedicated instructions refer to Chapter 8 For program examples on the I O data exchange using dedicated instructions refer to the following e Single CPU system gt Section 7 1 2 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 Precautions a Applicable QCPUs For QCPUs supporting the data consistency function refer to Section 2 1 SPE
38. Stored value 0 to 31 The alarm data are stored b15 b8 b7 bO 26453 6755x Alarm data 2nd byte Alarm data 1st byte 26454 6756x Alarm data 4th byte Alarm data 3rd byte to 26484 6774 Alarm data 64th byte Alarm data 63rd byte To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING M ELS 26 EAseries Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result ai gt 4 i 26485 6775H A response code is stored gt Stored value A501H The alarm type is stored Alarm type Zz i A fe Diagnosis alarm 5 Process alarm Se ao 26486 6776H Pull alarm og nO Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer o specific alarm Z z Alarm data No 1 The alarm status and sequence No are stored 1 O W b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 bi bO D 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 26487 6777H 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot A 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 6 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 2 0 No ACK return from the user is required T 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored va
39. Swapping of I O data The upper and lower bytes can be reversed swapped in word units when I O data is sent or received This simplifies programming as you no longer need to create a program for swapping the upper and lower bytes on the QJ71PB92V or DP Slave lt gt gt Section 4 4 Mountable on MELSECNET H remote I O station The QJ71PB92V can be mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station This allows you to install the QJ71PB92V at a remote site away from the QCPU gt Section 7 8 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error Stop Continue of I O data exchange For the case of a CPU stop error on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is mounted whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves can be specified lt 3 gt Section 4 6 Changing DP Slave setting to reserved station status temporarily Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP the station type of DP Slaves can be changed to Reserved station temporarily lt 3 Section 4 7 Since there is no need to change slave parameters changing a DP Slave setting to a reserved station is easy 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 8 Redundant system can be constructed a Redundancy is available for the QJ71PB92V By mounting the QJ71PB92V together with a redundant CPU a redundant system can be constructed Even if the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and standby systems are
40. UNSYNC This service is for ending the SYNC mode This service is for synchronizing the input status of DP Slaves In the FREEZE mode the input status of a DP Slave is refreshed each time it receives the FREEZE service PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION FREEZE While no FREEZE service is received the input status is held UNFREEZE _ This service is for ending the FREEZE service CL lt Supporting PROFIBUS DPV1 and PROFIBUS DPV2 PROFIBUS DPV1 and PROFIBUS DPV2 which are extended versions of PROFIBUS DP are supported The QJ71PB92V supports the following 1 PROFIBUS DPV1 e Acyclic communication with DP Slaves lt gt Section 4 2 1 e Alarm acquisition lt gt gt Section 4 2 2 e FDT DTM technology gt gt Section 4 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DPV2 e Time control function on DP Slaves lt lt gt gt Section 4 3 1 PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 1 Features 1 3 1 OVERVIEW 2 3 4 5 6 7 MELSEC TE cries I O data consistency Using the automatic refresh setting in GX Configurator DP or dedicated instructions BBLKRD BBLKWR ensures data consistency when reading writing I O data from the QJ71PB92V buffer memory lt gt gt Section 4 5 Easy parameter setup Use of GX Configurator DP enables bus parameters master parameters slave parameters and various other parameters to be easily set up 7 gt CHAPTER 6
41. e Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 e Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 Comm Trouble Area Extd Comm Trouble Area Slave Status Area POINT Set Block Transfer for the following applications e To refresh I O data of all DP Slaves into the same kind of device To reduce the number of automatic refresh parameters of the QJ71PB92V and increase the automatic refresh parameters of other intelligent function modules 6 16 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings Select Areas for Update with CPU 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC KE eries 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters Write the automatic refresh parameters to the QCPU ai Reset the QCPU after writing the automatic refresh parameters i O 1 Start procedure pa a Actions Access Master Module 28 2 Setting items 26 Check Update Autorefresh and click the Download button Configuration Download E C AMELSECAGX Configurator DP QJ71PB92V dp2 S 5 V Update Autorefresh Verify i 5 Leave Start DP Figure 6 9 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters N 6 E 2 POINT When automatic refresh parameters were written from GX Configurator DP while e GX Developer was running they are not displayed in file lists such as Read from PLC Delete PLC data on GX Developer a m 500 Update the file
42. ms value TcpuA ms 5 3 8 ms 2 Tsw ms value Table3 32 Tsw ms value PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION The following is calculated based on the case where signal flow memory is not E tracked omel a 20 5 ms The following is calculated based on the case where redundant CPUs are used and the number of words to be auto refreshed is 5 g Tam 27 us 6 us x Number of words to be auto refreshed E Tam ms 27 us 6 us x 5 word a 57 us u 0 057 ms The following conditions are applied Signal flow memory is not tracked No SFC program is executed No PID control instructions PIDINIT S PIDINIT are executed e Tracking devices are DO to D31 32 points Z Tro ms e Number of tracking blocks is 1 3 One tracking device range setting 5 Trc 1 32 x 0 09 x 10 1 x 4 x 109 1x 1x 10 1 00788 1 01 ms Tsw ms Gee Tsw 20 5 0 057 1 01 21 567 ms r 3 ZS Se az 3 5 Processing Time 3 66 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 67 3 Tp ms value Tp 2 2 4 2 x 0 01 3 x 1 0 35 38 1 ms 4 Scan ms value Scan 5 ms 5 Nand value Nand 3 From the above 1 to 4 Tscu ms is Tscu TcpuA Tsw Tp Scan x 2 8 21 567 38 1 5 x 2 77 667 ms Therefore the redundant system switching time Tsca ms is Tsca Tscu Nand x 20 77 667 3 x 20 137 667 ms 3 5 Processing
43. of occupied I O points 32 I O assignment 32 special 32 I O assignment 32 intelligent points 9 i 9 points points 1 The number of DP Slaves is 124 when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 2 Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Aries 2 Functional comparisons TableApp 4 Functional Comparisons Function QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D PROFIBUS DPVO I O data exchange o o o Acquisition of diagnostic and 2 2 extended diagnostic 2 Q 3 information Global control function O O O PROFIBUS DPV1 a Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 2 Alarm acquisition Oo x x Support of FDT DTM technology E a PROFIBUS DPV2 a Time control over DP Slaves Data swap function O O x Data consistency function o O o Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error O a 7 Temporary slave reservation O x x Redundant system support function O x x O Available x Not available 1 They are different in the number of connectable DP Slaves and I O data size lt 53 gt 1 in this appendix 2 Extended diagnostic information cannot be read from any station 3 Data consistency function by the FROM TO instruction only is executable Data consistency function by automati
44. 1 1H 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H The length of the written data is stored Unit byte Set value 1 to 240 3 3H Set the written slot No Set value 0 to 254 4 4H Set the written index Set value 0 to 255 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH T7 20 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING eG Q series b When failed Table7 20 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 On An error code is stored lt 3 Section 9 4 3 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_ SERVICE b15 b8 b7 b0 2 1 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00H to 7EH 0 to 126 1 When E443h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 1 is stored gt
45. 1 5 x 10 0 667 x 10s e In the case of 12 Mbps 1 TeiJ 1 12 x 10 0 083 x 10 s Tpit is converted into ms automatically on GX Configurator DP The results of the conversion ms are displayed on the right side of the screen 3 Precautions for bus parameter setting For each set value of the max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui and Setup Time T_set set the maximum value among those of the stations connected to PROFIBUS DP including the DP Master The default value of the QJ71PB92V varies depending on the transmission speed Table6 5 Default Values of max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui and Setup Time T_set Default Values of QJ71PB92V 187 5kbps 500kbps 3Mbps or less 60 250 450 800 max T_sdr 100 150 Quiet Time T_qui 0 0 0 3 6 9 Setup Time T_set 1 1 1 4 8 16 6 10 6 4 Bus Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 6 5 Slave Parameters ii Set parameters for each DP Slave lu 3 1 Start procedure a Right click on the graphic of the cable Insert DP Slave b Select a DP Slave in the Device Database screen PA Zg 2 Setting items BZ oO a Slave Parameter Settings screen Slave Parameter Settings Model HRKRERKNRS Revision z Vendor unune enr 5 Slave Properties g Name Slave_N _001 FOL Address i25 0 125 F Watchdog i Hd r oF min T_sdr i 1 255 Group identification number l Gpi Gp2 Gp3 Tl Gmp4 F Zz l Gp5 l Gpbl G
46. 2 y Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer lt 37 Section 6 7 Reset the following items e Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch The FDL address of the standby master is FBO2H FAULT LED ON duplicated with that of a DP SI setting of GX Developer L37 Section 6 7 peueeer pee sane e FDL Address in the slave parameter setting of GX Configurator DP lt gt Section 6 5 An error has occurred during processing of 2 7 ceanNseh ee ease consult your local Mitsubishi representative FBO3H FAULT LED ON system switching Control system fat ps explaining a detailed description of the problem Standby system Check the wiring status of the bus terminator s and PROFIBUS cable s lt gt Section 5 5 1 If the bus terminators and PROFIBUS cables are correctly connected increase the set value of the An error has occurred during processing of Master parameter Min slave interval FBO4H FAULT LED ON system switching Standby system gt e In the multi master system configuration check if Control system the FDL address of the control master is duplicated with that of another DP Master e If the same error occurs again after performing the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 4 Error Codes 9 23 9 4 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V
47. 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23050 5A0An 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23051 5A0Bu 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Each bit indicates the n th DP Slave 23052 5A0Cu 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23053 5A0Dx 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23054 5A0En 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23055 5A0Fu 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23055 5A0Fu are fixed to 0 Figure 3 17 Slave Status Area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 When the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is turned ON the data in the Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 are updated The following is an example QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Oo 0 L DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave i DP Slave DP Slave 1 FDL address 1 FDL address 4 i FDL address 6 FDL address 7 q FDL address 9 i Normal DP Slave omomysewe Normal DP Slave Reserved station echt ee i____feservation ____Feservation ___ 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module
48. 2nd module input cata or ne Tet macte is Stored ntal valie 22528 5800x PTFE 1800H to 27FFH_ Input data start address FFFFu Input data not assigned to 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo 22908 597Cu Input data start address of 125th module Figure 3 12 Input Data Start Address Area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 5 Output data start address area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the start address buffer memory address for each DP Slave s output data is stored in this area Creating a sequence program utilizng the Output data start address area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 allows address specification of the Output data area without consideration of the output points for each DP Slave Information of 125 modules is stored in the Output data start address area for mode FUNCTIONS au j 3 in the same order for each module on E m a age Address 62i DEC HEX b15 bo QEY 22912 5980 Output data start address of 1st module The start address buffer memory address of the 2 OD Ween pe oie eas eer WN f the 1 lei 22913 5981 Output data start address of 2nd module Lae ee sua i module isistored 22912 5980n ae j 38004 to 47FFH Output data start address S to FFFFH Output data not assigned E r W tu 22036 59FCx Output data start address of 125th module oa Figure 3 1
49. 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 of the QU71PB92V Not checked No function check Checked Function check performed DP V1 Support enable DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters button Check this checkbox to use the PROFIBUS DPV 1 functions This setting is available when the DP Slave supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Not checked Not use the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Checked Use the PROFIBUS DPV 1 functions Displays the DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters screen gt 2 b in this section This can be selected when DP V1 Support enable is checked Input CPU Device 2 Set the target device for automatic refresh of input data Use this setting when changing the refresh target device for each DP Slave For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points Output CPU Device 1 2 Sets the target device for automatic refresh of output data Use this setting when changing the refresh target device for each DP Slave For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points Swap I O Bytes in Master Check this box to swap the I O data of the DP Slave on the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Not checked No swapping Checked Enables data swapping User Param button Used when setting parameters specific to the DP Slave For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave button Select Modules Used when setting equipment mounted on the DP Slave For details refer to the manual for the D
50. Alarm read error response actions Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO E507H Currently not exchanging I O data and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E508H There is an error response to the ACK request actions Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E510H Physical execution error was detected y f corrective actions E520H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is Slave side correctly set or not and retry E521H There is no alarm that can be used on the DP Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave aa Check if the DP Slave supports the alarm function or not E530H Use of the alarm function is not allowed and retry Check if the DP Slave is properly exchanging I O data or E531H Invalid DP Slave status not and retry E540H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E541H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a non configured station 5424 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V E543H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station Ea Check if the alarm data returning ACK is stored in the E544H The alarm type is incorrect Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un 26768 and retry
51. C gt GX Configurator DP Operating Manual Were the same parameters written to both QJ71PB92Vs in System A and B Parameters set in GX Configurator DP No If any different parameter is found write the same parameters to the QU71PB92Vs in system A and B again Yes No Is the PROFIBUS cable wiring correct Check the PROFIBUS cable connections lt gt Section 5 5 Check if the devices that store the start command and output data in the sequence program are set as tracking devices Section7 9 Are the devices that store the start command and output data in the sequence program within the tracking range Store the tracked output data in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 L gt Section 7 9 Were the tracked output data stored in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 within 1 scan after system switching Completed Figure 9 4 When Output Data Turn OFF or Momentarily OFF in System Switching 9 6 9 3 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 3 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 26 Fel series 9 3 2 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON The following shows how to recover the QJ71PB92V in the new control system w
52. CORPORATION i eS Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 5Mbps gt FDL address fo Oei Head address on PLC foo 0 0 OaFE Eror action flag l Goto Clear State Min slave interval jeo p 65535 Polling timeout 5o 1 B5535 Data consistency Data control time fico T 65535 function is set T Watchdog cre MeOH A fie belie Automatic refresh function is set Watchdog for time sync 0 0 85535 Cancel Cefault Bus Param lt Slave parameters gt Select Areas for Update with CPU F Slave Specific Transfer D p 0 12t92 95 Dwipa fo fho m 12132 i95 The refresh destination Block Transfer of the I O data is set Comm Trouble Area None m Ui F Extd Comm Trouble Area Now fi EN i he refresh ination Sel the refresn destinato V Slave Status drea 200 0 122637 1224 of the slave status area Figure 7 5 Automatic Refresh Parameter Setting Example 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh PROGRAMMING 2 Program example SM402 j SET W400 W400 XIB XID XIE x0 Yo uo k F F ool HBO 62080 uo Hov K20 G2084 Uo e w 2 623608 RST W400 XIB XID XIF x20 x0 UO e _ _ 1 FHOVP KO G14336 K96 YO cyo Figure 7 6 I O Data Exchange Program Examples Automatic Refresh MELSEC KE eries Not needed when the initial setting is not changed Turn ON the initial set
53. DP After modifying parameters be sure to check the parameters Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 4 Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC A ni Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs 1 I O signals a Input signals Some input signals have been changed Change programs referring to the following table TableApp 5 Input Signal Comparisons Compa Replacement A1SJ71PB92D tibility precautions QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D X00 Data exchange start completed signal ON I O data exchange start completed O OFF I O data exchange start not completed X01 Diagnostic information detection signal ON Diagnostic information detected O OFF No diagnostic information detected X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal ON Area cleared OFF Area not cleared Communication trouble area clear end signal ON Area cleared O OFF Area not cleared X03 X04 X05 Use prohibited O Global control completed signal ON Global control completed O OFF Global control not completed Global control failed signal ON Global control failed O OFF Global control normally completed Extended diagnostic information read response X06 signal Use prohibited O ON Completed OFF Not completed X07 Use prohibited O X08 Use proh
54. Default 100 x 10 ms Watchdog Check this checkbox to enable the watchdog timer on all DP Slaves When the Watchdog checkbox is checked in the master parameter setting Watchdog in the slave parameters cannot be set Not checked The watchdog timer setting of all DP Slaves is disabled Checked The watchdog timer setting of all DP Slaves is enabled Slave Watchdog time Set a watchdog timer value for all DP Slaves This setting is available when Watchdog is checked The set value must satisfy the following condition e Bus cycle time lt Set value of Slave Watchdog time lt Set value of Data control time 6 e When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set an appropriate value so that the formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied Setting range 1 to 65025 Unit x 10 ms Default 5 x 10 ms Autom Refresh Check this checkbox to automatically refresh QCPU devices and QJ71PB92V buffer memory Not checked Automatic refresh disabled Checked Automatic refresh enabled Consistency Check this checkbox to use the data consistency function when automatic refresh is executed This checkbox is available when Autom Refresh is checked Not checked Data consistency function disabled Checked Data consistency function enabled Watchdog for time sync Set the time during which the transmission interval of the clock data sent from the time master is monitored Setting range 0 to 65535 Un
55. Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 12 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description X04 Global control completed signal Y04 Global control request signal X05 Global control failed signal b Devices used by the user Table7 13 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X25 Global control execution command MO Refresh start request lt _ gt Section 7 1 1 2 Program example HO X25 Y4 X4 UO ki A f HOV H320 62081 Sends SYNC service to groups 1and 2 SET Y4 J Global control request X4 Y4 X5 r n RST Y4 J Global control completion rocessin X5 Processing for failure of P 9 It global control RST Y4 J Global control completion processing Figure 7 13 Program Example for Global Control Function 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function T 13 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves The following explains the request and response formats in acyclic communications providing a program example The request and response formats in this section employ offset addresses in word units The offset address refers to the n th data in word units starting from the s
56. EAEE DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 61 X J vy DP Slave 31 modules Figure 2 2 Maximum Configuration with a Repeater Connected 1 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 2 5 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries 3 When 125 DP Slaves are connected DP Master QU71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 125 Repeaters 4 OVERVIEW 2 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as number of modules o Power 1 QJ71 supply QCPU pgg2vy ag module og Do Segment 1 O a Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave aes DP Slave b FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 30 q k vV Repeater 1 DP Slave 30 modules g n Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave eS eleven DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 2 Repeater 2 i J 2 y 2 DP Slave 30 modules r Segment 3 Quo a 93 N u DP Slave DP Slave PNPP DP Slave yi FDL address 61 FDL address 62 FDL address 89 28 2 w2a uz Repeater 3 1 N a Repeater 3 2 9 Eo ann DP Slave 29 modules Segment 4 Segment 5 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 90 FDL address 120 FDL address 121 FDL address 125
57. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or ha
58. Hardware failure If the same error occurs again please consult your F104H local Mitsubishi representative explaining a F105H detailed description of the problem PRM SET LED Parameters have not been written to the F106H flashing flash ROM Write the parameters Initialize the flash ROM and then write the The parameters or operation mode read parameters and operation mode sai FAULT LEDON from the flash ROM are corrupted If the same error occurs again replace the QJ71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM F108H FAULT LED ON KINA NEE R RL If the same error occurs again replace the f QJ71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM F10BH FAULT LED ON nae K a mode If the same error occurs again replace the QU71PB92V PRM SET LED In the parameter settings there is a DP Check the slave parameters and make the setting F10CH flashi Slave whose I O dale sive is set to 0 byte again to ensure that the I O data size of each DP asang yte Slave is 1byte or more Initialize the flash ROM PRM SET LED i F10DH l Parametererror If the same error occurs again please consult your flashing local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem F10EH F a A FAULT LED ON Hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative F10FH explaining a detailed description of the problem Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKRD F110H signal YOC is ON the BBLKRD instruction is executed w
59. Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M ELS 26 Eseries 1 Control master FDL address display area Un G2263 This area stores the FDL address of the control system QJ71PB92V when it is used in a redundant system The FDL address is stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON The FDL addresses for the control system are set in GX Configurator DP lt gt Section 6 3 OVERVIEW Table3 21 Control Master FDL Address Display Area Un G2263 Set Value Description CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 0000H to 007Dx 0 to 125 The FDL address of the QJ71PB92V in the control system oO e Parameter not registered e The QJ71PB92V is not mounted to a redundant system FFFFH 2 Standby master FDL address display area Un G2264 This area stores the FDL address of the standby system QJ71PB92V when it is used in a redundant system The FDL address is stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON The FDL addresses for the standby system are set in the Intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer lt gt Section 6 7 o Z O q o M oa 7 Table3 22 Standby Master FDL Address Display Area Un G2264 FUNCTIONS Set Value Description 00004 to 007DH The FDL address of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system 0 to 125 e Parameter not registered e The QJ71PB92V is not mounted to a redundant system FFFFH PROCEDURES AND
60. No is not set set Os to all of b15 to b8 in the Global control area Un G2081 For program examples on the global control function refer to the following e Single CPU system gt Section 7 3 e Redundant system K gt Section 7 9 3 4 10 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions POINT i 1 To utilize PROFIBUS DPV1 functions use a DP Slave that supports the z PROFIBUS DPV1 For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When using the PROFIBUS DPV1 function set a Min slave interval value z greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr lt gt Section 5 3 5 1 Dg If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and 26 Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV1 function may take time no 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves q O This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing independently of I O data exchange Up to eight requests are executable DP Master Class 1 Power supply QJ71 module QCPU ppooy Writing data to eels ee from any DP Slave AA a I O data exchange Tl DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave o Z O O Z 5 Le PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Figure 4 9 Acyclic Communication 1 Services available
61. OFF after execution of self diagnostics this indicates z a normal completion b TEST and FAULT LEDs ON When failed If the TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON after execution of self diagnostics this 5 indicates that the diagnostics failed Check the value stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 and retry the o self diagnostics qJ If the diagnostics fails again a QJ71PB92V hardware error is probable Please check the value currently stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 and consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem z c Values that may be stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 5 Any of the following values is stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 F after execution of self diagnostics 2 Table5 5 Self diagnostics Result O7FFH Normal completion F700H ROM check test error F701H Timer test error o F702H MPU test error R F703H RAM test error 5 F704H 2 port RAM test error F705H Swap port test error TE 93 ty ww oOo ae WZ i z OE rus ann PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 4 Self diagnostics 5 8 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC IA ries 5 5 Wiring This section explains PROFIBUS cable wiring and relevant precautions 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring The following describes the pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector on the QJ71PB92V the PROFIBUS cab
62. OOO OOOO OO SOO OOOOH OOS OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOOO OO OOOOH OOO OOOOOOOOOO 4 11 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OO OOO OOOO OOOOH SOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOH OO OOO OOOOCE 4 14 4 2 3 FDT DTM technology e eeeeeeeseseessesccsoccocccccccccccccccccoccoccococeccccccccccesccscoccococcocooecoeoe 4 16 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions COCO COO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 17 4 3 1 Time control over DP SlavEs ecccccocccoocoooc0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 17 4 4 Data Swap FUNCtion es esseeseesecsecseeceeccoococcoosoococccoococcoccoseoccoccocccoceosoesoecsoocooceosoosooose 4 1 4 5 Data Consistency FUNCTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeccecccecccoecceccccoccccccccoccocceccococcccccceoccccocceoceooccee 4 21 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceecccoccceooccocceeoscooceosee 4 24 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function eesseeeeeseeeeseeeecceececoocecccccceoosoccococcesococsssccoesssoesosee 4 27 4 8 Redundant system support functione eececcsccecccccocoocooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 29 CHAPTERS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 5 1 to 5 11 5 1 Implementation and Installation ccooocoocoooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F a 1 5 1 1 Handling precautions 000oo0oooooo0000000000000000000000000000000
63. QJ71PB92V 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Status of External Power Supply Fuse Status Status of 1 0 Address Verify Error Displa Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Noise Filter Setting Input Type Agree Remote password setty status No Error Code Be Display format Present Error F124 ae ee HEX Product information 070910000000000 B Displays the latest error code 2 F110 3 FINI 4 F124 Displays the error history The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Error contents Disposal Displays the description of the error code selected in the error history and the action against it Contents Diagnostic information was generated on a DP Slave Disposal Check Diagnostic information area for diagnostic information generated in a DP Slave and take corrective actions HZW Information Stop monitor Figure 9 8 Module s Detailed Information Screen GX Developer 9 10 9 4 Error Codes Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA series 9 4 1 Error codes E2004 to E2FFu Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information 10 Z e e I o wW l a O Table9 4 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error Code Error Description Action E200H The specified FDL address is o
64. SYNC service SYNC service Issued within the same group oe OL Output to external device Figure 4 6 SYNC UNSYNC 4 8 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG cries b FREEZE UNFREEZE 1 FREEZE This service starts the FREEZE input synchronization mode gt In the FREEZE mode the input status is refreshed every time a DP Slave z receives the FREEZE service If no FREEZE service is received the input status is held 2 UNFREEZE S This service ends the FREEZE input synchronization mode 5 DP Master Class 1 fa 3 Power QJ71 supply QCPU pBg2v module FREEZE service is sent to group 3 b 6 Bus terminator Bus terminator S i g Group 8 Group 3 Group 3 D DP Slave 1 DP Slave 3 DP Slave n E o Z O O Z 5 ire awd i Zee Input image memory data are refreshed at all times by polling F os Wop 5020 near 4 lt During UNFREEZE execution Default gt Actual input data are input to the input memory 2 ER without being changed Normal status He 4 gt lt During FREEZE execution gt Actual input data are input only once to the input image memory at the timing of the FREEZE service g 5 4 FREEZE service Issued within the same group a m t Input to external device ee Figure 4 7 FREEZE UNFREEZE o zZ Ss g 0 fe ps n 6 QE z5 SE Q Bz 4 1 PROFI
65. Section 5 5 Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the DP Slave and start the DP Slave zZ ore ESI fy wi wi ro ABS near SEs Ww gt ann 37 gt Manual for DP Slave Change the operation mode of the QU71PB92V to Communication mode mode 3 for exchange with Section 6 2 DP Slaves 1 Start I O data exchange 2 PARAMETER SETTING Did I O data exchange start successfully Check the LED status lt 3 Section 5 3 Completed 1 Change the operation mode by either of the following methods Change it from GX Configurator DP Use the operation mode change request area Un G2255 and Operation mode change request signal Y11 No Review parameter settings PROGRAMMING 2 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 Start it from GX Configurator DP Figure 5 1 Procedures before System Operation Single CPU System DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation 5 2 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system D PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEG LY series 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system Mount the QJ71PB92V on the base unit Set the RUN STOP switches of the redundant CPUs in system A and B to STOP and turn ON the power supply to systems A and B Set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Debug mode
66. Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E443 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 2 2h 1 When E443h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored lt 3 Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E4434 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 3 3H 1 When E443h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 3 is stored lt Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E443n is currently stored in offset address 0 0nH Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 4 4H Empty area Sree A Stored value 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE 7 21 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_ SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the INITIATE service Class2_ SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 21 Request format Offset Address Description Set Value O 0H Set a request code Set value 1412H 1 1H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave to which the network
67. Set summer time 4 Set advance notice of summer winter time switching 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour 5 Set the time difference the time to be added or subtracted The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Set value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Set the time calculation method 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves T 53 7 6 3 Time data write request OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 50 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 2 68B uate Stored value A602H 26801 68B1h to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H b When failed Table7 51 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0n An error code is stored _ 3 Section 9 4 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H T 54 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 3 Time data write request PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 6 4 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this sect
68. Slaves ececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccococcs 7 48 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 3 7 6 4 Time data read request COOOL COOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOO OOOO OO OOO OOO OOOOOOOCE 7 49 Time data write request UTC format eeeeeeeececccccccccococccccoceccccccceccecccccoccococoococcccccceoe 7 51 Time data write request COOOL OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOO HOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OOO OOOOLOOEE 7 53 Program example COO COOOL OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OS OOOO OOD OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO SOO OSOOOOOOO 7 55 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation 0000000 COOOL OOL OOOO OOS OO OOOO O OOOO OOOOOOOO OOOO OOOOOOOE 7 57 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 58 7 8 1 7 8 2 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station 7 58 Other precautions OOOO COO OOO OOOO LOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOOO OS OO OOOOH OOOOH OOOOOOOOOOS 7 65 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System COO COOOOOOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOCE 7 66 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 I O Data Exchange Program ExamplESe e esesecccccecccoccsccococococcosccscocococooososocococococosooo 7 70 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information eseeesseseeeseeeeeeeee 7 B0 Program example for glo
69. Time 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system MELSEC TA eries 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG cries u This chapter explains the functions of the QJ71PB92V 3 Table4 1 Function List on Reference Function Description i z Section O PROFIBUS DPVO m g qo Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V enabling the I O data E x exchange of max 8192 bytes chs I O data exchange Lionas Section 4 1 1 Note that it is limited up to 124 DP Slaves when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system Acquisition of diagnostic Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slaves and extended diagnostic during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O Section 4 1 2 2 information signals J By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a f Global control function i Section 4 1 3 O group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available m N PROFIBUS DPV1 _ Acyclic communication This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing ee i 2 with DP Slaves independently of I O data exchange PET This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have y Alarm acquisition Section 4 2 2 been generated on any DP Slave n pa Support of FDT DTM Using a commercially available FDT reading writing
70. To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 41 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 26449 6751H 26450 6752H 26451 6753H 26452 6754H 26453 6755H to 26484 6774H 1 42 MELSEC TA eries Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result Alarm data No 1 The length of the alarm data is stored Unit byte Stored value 1 to 64 The alarm type is stored Stored valie Alarm type A510 Diagnosis alarm A511H Process alarm Pull alarm Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer specific alarm The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 bO po a 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored
71. XIF x0 Yo UO tiai j ici as Initializes Diagnostic info AF ca AF NOV Hang Geet sinvalid ae UO Initializes Diagnostic info non 1 Moy me 62094 pete time setting area UO 1 Specifies the 2nd t 2 I pecifies the 2nd temporary eo eas slave reserration 8 i rest he Turn OFF the initial setting z Ta a execution command w X1B X1D XIF X20 XO UO Writes the initial z t j 4 FHOVP KO G14336 K96 output data value Yo cvo I O data exchange x1D X1F start processing a l wo X MO yg 2 m XOG i _ AAA BBL KR uo K6144 DO K96 Pead a NO UO rewov 623040 D200 Kos Reads Slave status area ne 255 mmm i SO nk N E Do Program for DP Slave control gt Section 7 1 1 2 a aQs OFF ene sss eee ee ann XOG BBLKWR execution ji LG BBLKWR uo Klade Ne kas Writing output data PARAMETER SETTING N Figure 7 10 I O Data Exchange Program Example Dedicated instructions PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T 9 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions 7 10 PROGRAMMING EJPOINT M ELSEG seres Confirm that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled L gt Section 6 3 When the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled dedicated instructions are not processed Master Settings Module 71PB32V A AEE L Revision aA Vendor MITSUBIS
72. XO X1B X1D XIF start processing a a A a i a A sto NO UO m E G6144 DO K96 Reading input data U0 BMOV 623040 D200 K25 Reads Slave status area Program for DP Slave control lt Section 7 1 1 2 a ji NO UO J l Buoy D100 614336 K9 Writing output data Program for reading diagnostic information lt _ gt Section 7 1 1 2 b Figure 7 11 I O Data Exchange Program Example MOV instruction 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T 11 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC EA sries 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information 1 Assignment of devices in program examples The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 9 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Extended diagnostic information read response 3 o X06 sional Y06 Extended diagnostic information read request signal i b Devices used by the user Table7 10 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X24 Extended diagnostic information read command c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 11 List of Devi
73. a program example for reexecuting the time control function after system switching 1 Request and response formats For the request and response formats used for the time control over DP Slaves refer to Sections 7 6 1 to 7 6 3 FUNCTIONS 2 Program example a Settings The setting is the same as in Section 7 6 4 1 b Device assignments in program example 1 Devices used by the QJ71PB92V The devices are the same as in Section 7 6 4 2 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Devices used by the user Table7 76 List of User Devices Device Description Device Time control execution command SM1518 3 Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target The device assignment is the same as that in Section 7 6 4 2 Description PARAMETER SETTING ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 83 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition PROGRAMMING MELSEC Asri c Tracking devices for reexecuting the function in the case of system switching In the program for the time control over DP Slaves data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Time control start request signal Y 19 is turned ON e Start command device to which time control request data are set Table7 77 Tracking Transfer Dev
74. acquisition e Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology e FDT DTM technology E4E2uH A Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure M Pee E4E3xH explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 4 Error Codes 9 17 9 4 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication 10 Z e e I o wW l a 5 O E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING alarms MELSEC TE eries Error codes E500H to E563H 9 4 4 Error codes E5004 to ESFFu Error codes generated when reading Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error Code Error Description Action E500H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E501H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a non configured station 5024 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V E503H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E504H The alarm read request code is incorrect Check if the specified request code is correct and retry oo Check if the bit specified in the buffer memory address E505H The ACK request bit is incorrect 26434 6742H is correct and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E506H
75. b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3b2 bi bO g 6 5 0 l4 alo 2 o l1 R 1 Set the synchronous setting with the time master 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Set the time resolution minimum unit A 00 ims Z 01 10ms 2 10 100ms 2 11 1s 2 26789 68A5h 3 Set summer or winter time 0 Set winter time 1 Set summer time 4 Set advance notice of summer winter time switching ow 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour lt OS 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour id L Ww 5 Set the time difference the time to be added or subtracted RO L The value 0 means No addition or subtraction 2E Set value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours T ig A 6 Set the time calculation method 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference f Z 26790 68A6H to Empty area Write 0000n E 26792 68A8h Set value Fixed to 0000H E i PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves T 51 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 47 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 2 68B uate Stored value A601H 26801 68B1h to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H b W
76. e Acyclic communication e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology FDT DTM technology E5A1H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure Ag ie E5A2H explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 20 9 4 Error Codes 9 4 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA series 9 4 5 Error codes E600x to E6FFu Error codes generated when executing time control Table9 8 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error Code Error Description Action E600H The request code is incorrect Check if the request code is correct and retry After writing clock data from another time master execute E601H No clock data have been written from another time master the time data read request again E602H E603H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure _ E604H explaining a detailed description of the problem E605H The UTC second value set in the Time control setting Check if the UTC second value is correct and retry E611H request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 is out of the nae lt 3 Section 7 6 2 E612H E613H E614H E615H A Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure _ E622H explaining a detailed description of the problem E623H E624H E625H E626H Incorrect Year At the time
77. event any foreign object enters remove it immediately 4 A protective film is attached onto the module top to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips entering the module when wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation 5 Tighten the module fixing screws and connector screws using torque within the following ranges Table5 1 Screw Tightening Torque Screw Location Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 N m PROFIBUS cable connector screw 630 i604 Nan 4 AOUNC screws i 5 1 5 1 Implementation and Installation 5 1 1 Handling precautions PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSECA series 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation The following diagram illustrates the procedure before system operation ti 3 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system Start Zz Mount the QU71PB92V on the base unit o Be as Turn ON the power Perform self diagnostics of the QU71PB92V Section 5 4 z Set the PROFIBUS DP parameters on GX Configurator DP L gt Section 6 1 O Use output status No setting for the case of a CPU stop error Make I O assignments on GX Developer set the error time 2 output mode and write the PLC parameters to the QCPU gt Section 4 6 E 2 Reset the QCPU 5 Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the QU71PB92V
78. for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Informationessssscceceeecccecceceeeee 7 12 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function Oe 7 13 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves e eeeeeeeeeecceccecceccecoecoocoocoooo00 7 14 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 4 4 7 4 5 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE eeeeeeeeceeesoeeeecoceoococccocoeoososeeee 7 16 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE eeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseecocoosooeccocoeooseee 7 19 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE eeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeccececoccoccccccocccecccoccececococcccooscccesssee 7 22 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE eeseeeseeeeeessesecccoecococcoccccccesseooccccccesssocccoocoessosee 7 26 Program example CO00OOOOOOOOOOO00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 28 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 0000 000000000 OOOO OO OOO OOOO LOO OOOO SOO OO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOO 7 30 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 5 3 7 5 4 Alarm read request without ACK COOOOOOOOOOOOCOOOCO0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 31 Alarm ACK request COO COOOL OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OS OOD OOOO OOO OOOOOCO 7 35 Alarm read request with ACK OO 7 40 Program example COO COOOL COO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOO OOO OOOOE 7 46 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP
79. iKi Moea Oms timer value that meets the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 WED me IGS U E l Gp5S I Gp l Gp l Gps Set it as a Normal DP Slave F DP Y1 support enabled I Syne Output I Freeze Input m Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory Input CPU Device None v Output CPU Device None 0 0 I Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master Cancel Default User Param Set the I O data size Figure 7 33 I O Data Exchange Parameter Setting Example GX Configurator DP T 72 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC al eries d Parameter settings in GX Developer i lt Intelligent function module switch setting gt z ui Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module 5 Input format HEX X 6 Set a standby master FDL address 20 ne f LS D Select Device detail 2 settings attari gt o fe No tracking All tracking device capacity lt Do tracking Device total increases 16K word Q E Device detail setings 9 Do auto forward Tracking block No 1 ieee block os 1 ute ON SM1520 ma nies Na es Device range settings i Points 7 Start Start End Set tracking devices Reyes tel tela kaa File register file settings Target memory File name 2 O E 8 4 Tracking characteristics setting E Synchronized tracking mode T ake more scan time C Program priority mode
80. lists by the Refresh view button of the Read from PLC or Delete PLC a2 amp OE amp data on GX Developer Too 0 zZ im o pe mi w PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 17 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters MELSEC TA eries There are restrictions on the number of automatic refresh parameters that can be set for QCPUs This section describes the number of automatic refresh parameters that can be set for QCPUs and the QJ71PB92V 1 Number of automatic refresh parameter settings for QCPUs When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of automatic refresh parameter settings must not exceed the following limit Table6 9 Max No of Auto refresh Parameter Settings CPU Type Max No of Auto refresh Parameter Settings Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 256 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU 256 Q12PH Q25PHCPU 256 Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 256 2 Number of automatic refresh parameter settings for the QJU71PB92V The number of automatic refresh parameter settings for the QJU71PB92V varies depending on the automatic refreshing setting method for I O data a When Block Transfer is used When the automatic refresh of I O data is set by Block Transfer i e I O data of all DP Slaves are refreshed into the same kind of device up to five automatic refresh parameters can
81. memory to devices in QCPU by the following methods Table4 2 Read Write Methods Read Write Methods Setting Location Data Consistency Function Automatic refresh GX Configurator DP Dedicated instructions Available Sequence program BBLKRD BBLKWR MOV or FROM TO instructions Sequence program Not available 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 1 I O data exchange 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG cries 2 Starting and stopping I O data exchange a Write the initial value of the output data to the Output data area for mode 3 gt Un G14336 to Un G18431 gt b Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 c When I O data exchange is started after turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON d Input data from DP Slaves are stored in the Input data area for mode 3 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 26 e Turning OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO turns OFF the Data exchange start request signal X00 and I O data exchange is stopped 2 Output data exchange O Data exchange start A request signal Y00 D Data exchange start completed signal X00 Bus cycle time Bc Be Bc Be I O data exchange I O data exchange n started stopped O Output data area for mode 3 eae Output data V Output data V Output data 5 Un G143
82. of the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM c When the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 is turned ON and reading of the extended diagnostic information of the specified FDL address is completed the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 turns ON oO d After the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 has turned ON turn OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 7 2 O lt Q u 3 w a 2 e Turning OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 turns OFF the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 Extended diagnostic Extended diagnostic information read request information read request signal Y06 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 Extended diagnostic information read completed FUNCTIONS Figure 3 6 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Request Signal Y06 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Response Signal X06 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION For details on acquisition of extended diagnostics information refer to Section 4 1 2 PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 12 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel aries 7 Data consistency start request si
83. of write request E627H Incorrect Month At the time of write request E628H Incorrect Day At the time of write request E629H Inconsistent Date At the time of write request E62AH Incorrect Hour At the time of write request Check if the request data is correct and retry E62BH Incorrect Minute At the time of write request E62CH Incorrect Second At the time of write request Clock data is out of the range At the time of write E62DH request 9 4 Error Codes 9 21 9 4 5 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error codes generated when executing time control 10 Z e e I v wW l a 0 APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA cries Error codes F100H to F120H 9 4 6 Error codes F100n to F1FFx Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFuH Error Code LED Status Error Description Action FDL address No of a DP Slave is Check the FDL addresses of the DP Master and F100H FAULT LED ON duplicated with that of the DP Master in the DP Slaves and set correct parameters without parameter settings duplication Set the slave parameters again so that one or more F1014 FAULTLED ON NO DP Slaves are set to perform I O data 115 ciaves will perform I O data exchange Check exchange in the parameter settings Wik git the Active slave parameter F102H Replace the QJ71PB92V F103H F FAULT LED ON
84. processing is completed If the operation mode change is attempted during execution of the following processing E3024 is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 e Acquisition of extended diagnostic information e Global control function e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology e Time control function c When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system 1 Operation mode of redundant CPU If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 C Section 9 4 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC KE eries 2 Tracking transfer between redundant CPUs Stop the tracking transfer between the redundant CPUs Use the special relays SM1520 to SM1583 of the redundant CPU to stop the ii gt tracking transfer gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System g If the operation mode of the QJU71PB92V is changed without stopping the tracking transfer an error code may be stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 3 Confirmation after operation mode change To use the redundant CPU in Backup mode check that the same operation 2 o mode is active in the QJ71PB92V in s
85. prohibited Oo Alarm read response x18 ses aac Use prohibited oO OFF Not completed Time control start response x19 b dnd Use prohibited O OFF Not completed X1A Use prohibited O Communication READY signal X1B ON I O data exchange ready O OFF 1 O data exchange not ready X1C Use prohibited O Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible 1 The watchdog timer error signal code has been changed to X1F Change the corresponding section in the sequence program To the next page Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 6 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC LAY ceries TableApp 5 Input Signal Comparisons Continued Compa Replacement A1SJ71PB92D ibili i QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D tibitity precautions AJ71PB92D Module READY signal X1D ON Module start completed O OFF Module start not completed X1E Use prohibited O When replacing the A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D refer to 1 shown below Watchdog timer error signal X1F ON Watchdog timer error occurred OFF Watchdog timer error not occurred Use prohibited A Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible 1 The watchdog timer error signal code has been changed to X1F Change the corresponding section in the sequence program App aT Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions f
86. recovery of the switching target DP Slave an S error occurred at another DP SIEM Cn D ae Lu tu New standby system New control system z lt Q ey Redundant QJ71 es Redundant QJ71 itchi module CPU PB92V switching module CPU PB92V Tracking cable o Bus terminator 9 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave S FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 failure failure D 5 a Eo Q uZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 56 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 57 MELSEC TE cries 4 System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection Un G23664 to Un G23672 Address DEC HEX 23665 5C71H 23666 5C72H 23667 5C73H 23668 5C74H 23669 5C75x 23670 5C76H 23671 5C77H 23672 5C78x SoS aS S amp S SSS SS a System switching condition setting result Un G23664 The results of the setting in the System switching condition Un G23648 are stored 0 OR condition 1 AND condition b System switching DP Slave specification result Un G23665 to Un G23672 The results of the setting in the System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 are stored 0 Not system switching target 1 System switching target b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b4 b1 bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 5 2 Each bit represent
87. request c Program example for operation mode change Self diagnostics mode When changing the operation mode using this program example do not change the operation mode from GX Configurator DP Yo YU X11 X23 U0 e N y y _in HOVP K2 62255 SET y SET M2 H2 x1 van Uo f fWOVP G2256 D1100 Writing of operation J mode Self diagnostic mode Operation mode change request tot Reading the operation mode change result D1100 Processing for normal completion HOA300 RST YI Operation mode change completion processing Lot HOA300 Processing for error completion RST Yu RST M2 Operation mode change completion processing Lot Operation mode change completion processing Figure 7 9 Program Example for Operation Mode Change Self diagnostics Mode 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves ai using dedicated instructions i f f f6 This program example is based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 Not needed when the initial setting is not changed 6 E aaa mc amc Ps ari ser iad Turn ON the initial 9 setting execution command E z M400 X1B XID
88. reserved stations with slave parameters to Normal DP Slave status is not allowed For the temporary slave reservation function refer to Section 4 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 52 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 14 Redundant system area This area is used for the redundant system support function For details on the redundant system support function refer to Section 4 8 4 POINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Redundant system area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configu rator DP Slave List Tnput Addr Input Size Output Addr Output size Order of assignment Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s in GX Configurator DP the order of the assigned DP Slaves is changed After modifying parameters check the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expeceted to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt gt Section 6 5 3 53 3 4 Buffer
89. settings 9 ire Table7 66 DP Slave Settings 1st module lS EES aws FDL address FDL address 2 2 z tu m a Input data size 96 words 192 bytes So I O data size ofm Output data size 96 words 192 bytes Ar 7 o Table7 67 DP Slave Settings 2nd module a E WwW Ww FDL address FDL address 3 z Input data size 1 words 2 bytes I O data size 7 Output data size 1 words 2 bytes 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 127 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MIELSEC TA eries c Parameter settings in GX Configurator DP lt Master parameters gt Master Settings Module QJ71PB92V Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION pasanik press Set the transmission Name PROFIBUS Master Speed Badate Mam Set the control master FDL address fof 125 FDL address Head address on PLC 0 Ox0 OsFE Set the I O No of the Error action flag Goto Clear State QJ71PB92V Min slave interval feos 65595 First 2 digits Poling timeout 50 1 65535 Data control time 600 1 65535 I Watchdog IV Autom Refresh F Consistency Watchdog for time sync 0 0 65535 Cancel Default Bus Param lt Slave parameters gt Slave Parameter Settings Model rununu Revision Vendor innuna REX Slave Properties Set the FDL address of N the DP Slave FDL Address Set a Slave Watchdog LA TOTEEN
90. slot 1 of a base unit However since the power supply capacity may be insufficient depending on the combination with the other mounted modules and the number of mounted modules be sure to check the power supply capacity when mounting the modules 1 Limited to the slots where the I O points of the CPU module or network module remote I O station are within the allowable range 2 4 2 1 Applicable System 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Compatible software packages The following shows the compatibility between software packages and the system using the QJ71PB92V GX Developer For setting QCPU parameters and creating sequence programs Required eG Q series GX Configurator DP Configuration software for the QJ71PB92V Required Table2 2 Compatible Software Packages System Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system Software Package GX Developer GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU Single CPU system Version 4 or later Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Q12PH Q25PHCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Version 7 10L or later Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 17T or later When mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later 2 1 Applicable System Version 7 or later PROCEDURES AND OVERVIEW N Z O z 5 o ra Z Q O SYSTEM SP
91. stored 6841H to 6864H 26729 to 26764 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 8 is stored 6869H to 688CH c The Alarm read response signal X18 turns ON when alarms on the specified DP Slave are read and the execution result is stored to the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 d Read the alarm information from the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 and turn OFF the Alarm read request signal Y 18 e Turning OFF the Alarm read request signal Y18 turns OFF the Alarm read response signal X18 For details on acquisition of alarms refer to Section 4 2 2 eeeeeoeeeceaoeaeeeaoeoseeaeeseeoeeeeeeeeeeseeeoeeeceoeseeeeeeceaeoee eee eo 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA eries 12 Time control start request signal Y19 Time control start response signal X19 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Time control start request signal Y19 when executing the time control over DP Slaves according to the information set in the Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 b Turning ON the Time control start request signal Y19 clears the information in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 c The Time control start response signal X19 turns ON when the time control over DP Slaves is executed and the execution result is stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to
92. that notified of the latest extended diagnostic information in addresses 23328 5B20 23329 to 23454 5B21H to SB9En is stored Initial value 0000 0000 to 007D 0 to 125 FDL address The data size of the latest extended diagnostic information in addresses 23330 to 23454 5B22x to 5B9Ex 23329 5B21n S stored Initial value 00001 0000 to OOF 4n Data size of extended diagnostic information unit byte The latest information of status 1 is stored The latest information of status 2 is stored Initial value 00H Initial value 00x 23330 5B22h 001 Normal O0 Normal Other than 00 K3 This section 4 b Other than 00x gt This section 4 b The latest status 3 information Whether or not any The latest FDL address of the DP Master is stored extended diagnostic information other than the one Initial value 00H 23331 5B23x sent this time is stored in the DP Slave is stored For the DP Slave that has not started I O data Initial value 00x exchange FFu is stored 00H No other extended diagnostic information 00 to 7Dx 0 to 125 FDL address exists 804 Other extended diagnostic information exists 23332 5B24n 23333 5B25n The latest ident No of the DP Slave is stored Initial value 0000 to The latest extended diagnostic information max 244 bytes is stored Initial value 00001 23454 5B9En Figure 3 26 Extended Diagnostic Information Area for
93. the following instances Error code 4101 th Ww e When a value outside the setting range is set to the set data field z e When the size which is obtained by adding the number of read data to the start address of reading data exceeds the buffer memory size e When the points available for the start address of reading data or after is less than the number of read data Z oO O f oe o Z O O ir E 2 zZ 1b 1B Oy N 8 2 BBLKRD Instruction 8 4 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEG lA aries Program example At the timing of M10 ON data of 960 points are read to DO to D959 from address 6144 1800 of the Input data area for mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V module start I O No 0 with data consistency ensured M10 X0C m eseo uo K6144 Do k90 o Figure 8 4 BBLKRD Instruction Program Example 8 5 8 2 BBLKRD Instruction 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 8 3 BBLKWAR Instruction Table8 5 Device Usable in the BBLKWR Instruction gt x WEET CE GA w O Internal device MELSECNET 10 H Special ket X Set data System user File function J Constant register register module K H Zz 5 E 0 O E be Q n2 O ns o a nO m n Instruction Execution symbol condition 5 Command 9 5 BBLKWR GBBLKWR Figure 8 5 BBLKWR Instruction Set data Table8 6 Set Data in the BBLKWR Instructi
94. the order of FDL addresses The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configu rator DP Slave List DL Addr Link Status Input Addr Input Size Output Addr Output Size Order of assignment eaa pse es e E 2 3 3 4 Buffer Memory 18 18 Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expeceted to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt Section 6 5 The information in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 is not cleared even if the problem occurred on the DP Slave has been solved To clear the information in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELS eG el series b Information of status 1 and 2 The diagnostic information generated on DP Slaves is stored to status 1 and 2 and corresponding bits turn ON 1 I O data exchange between a DP Master and DP Slaves is continued even if any of t
95. time output mode is set to Clear a Communications with DP Slaves are interrupted and output data are not sent b Input data received from DP Slaves are held in the buffer memory of the QU71PB92V When the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system set the watchdog timer for DP Slaves so that the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied If the formula is not satisfied a watchdog timer error occurs in DP Slaves during system switching CAUTION Do not install PROFIBUS cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 9inch or more between them Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the PLC under the environment specified in the user s manual of the CPU module to be used Otherwise it may cause electric shocks fires malfunctions product deterioration or damage While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of the module insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit to mount the module Incorrect mounting may cause malfunctions a failure or a drop of the module In an environment of frequent vibrations secure the module with the screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range If the screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Overtightening may damage the screw and or
96. to information detection 1 840 to 844 5A181 22784 to 22908 Input data start address area 5900 to for mode 3 597C 2128 to 2247 I O start address Extended 22912 to 850 to 8C7x service mode MODE E only 23036 Output data start address 5980 to area for mode 3 59FC MELSEC TE eries Replacement precautions Buffer memory addresses have been changed Change the corresponding section in the sequence program 1 Values stored in the buffer memory and the operation specifications on the QJ71PB92V are different from those of the former models lt 5 Section 3 4 1 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs App 10 TROUBLESHOOTING N W 9 A z W Q Q lt INDEX APPENDICES App 11 MELSEC TE eries 3 Program replacement examples The following example shows how sample programs provided in the QJ71PB92D manual are changed for the QJ71PB92V For the A1SJ71PB92D and AJ71PB92D replace the programs referring to the following replacement examples a Deleting the diagnostic information area type selection signal Y03 Relevant sample programs Sections 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 SET M400 4400 X1B XID XIF X0 Yo n K i r aa 4 18 HO K2080 H2B9 KI T0 HO K2084 K20 K1 eee eee i seT Y3 i p ON ey a ae EEE ee E A EO EE I RST M400 Delete t
97. to enable transmission of the Process Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Not checked Disables transmission of the Process Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Process Alarm Pull Plug Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Not checked Disables transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm Allow max one alarm of each type Check this checkbox to acquire alarms one by one for each type when the DP Slave detects multiple types of alarms Not checked Acquires alarms in order of occurrence Max 8 alarms Checked Acquires generated alarms one by one for each type Max 6 alarms 6 14 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters by which data in the QJ71PB92V buffer memory are gt automatically transferred to QCPU devices z 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter setup procedure The following describes the automatic refresh parameter setup procedure z ae 2S Make the automatic refresh setting Autom Refresh and data f lt gt Section 6 3 consistency setting Consistency in the master parameters i z o m Refresh I O data of all No D DP Slaves into the same kind of devic
98. was detected during write processing on For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave the DP Slave side E4B3H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave E4B4H side The service not available for the specified DP Slave was E4B5H requested E4B6H Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the DP Slave side E4B7H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E4B8H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request x Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E4C0H The CommRef number is incorrect retry E4D0H E4D1H E4D2H E4D3H E4D4H E4D5H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure NR aoa E4D6H explaining a detailed description of the problem E4D7H E4D8H E4D9H E4DAH E4DBH Another Acyclic communication or alarm request is being p NE E4DCH Verify that another Acyclic communication or alarm executed to the same DP Slave request has been completed and then retry E4DDH There is no executable resource E4DEH There is an invalid parameter setting Check the parameter settings and then retry 9 16 9 4 Error Codes To the next page 9 4 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA series Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action 1 Check the PROFIBUS cable wiring
99. was detected on the DP Slave side E569H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Access to an access disabled area was attempted from the E56AH DP Slave side E56BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E56CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E56DH Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave side correctly set or not and retry E56EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E56FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side E570H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Slave side E571H Resource error was detected during read processing on the DP Slave side E572H Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E573H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side E574H There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave side E575H Incorrect parameter exists in the ACK request There is no alarm for which ACK can be requested Check the alarm status on the specified DP Slave and E581H The alarm specified for ACK request is not found retry ERS Check if the DP Slave supports the alarm function or not E582H Use of the alarm function is not allowed and retry E590H E591H E592H E593H E594H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative E595H Hardware failure fh i explaining a detailed description of
100. 0 Processing at input data reception X a occ M100 1 p2000 0 x30 a C100 81 Processing at output data reception D l Y14F Figure App 4 Changing Program for Input and Output Data e Changing the program for reading diagnostic information Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 x1 i TLFROWP HO K2040 D1000 K5 l N u a o a u u eee eee eee ee ee eee i o X21 PLS i Change the program so that each station status is read from Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Change the program so that diagnostic information is read from the each station status read at 1 HO K23057 D1000 KI I eee HO K23072 D1010 K2 i PLS M1 Figure App 5 Changing Program for Reading Diagnostic Information Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 14 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES App 15 f Replacing a dedicated instruction QJ71PB92D only Relevant sample program Section 7 4 MELSEC TE eries W100 I CYC X LAN EES ENNEN ENE E ee 20G mo X l pan A 1 W101 l 6 BBLKRD uo l KO 4 D200 KI 7 Pi i a ete ER J ao W101 i l T BHOY_ K4Y100 D300 KI 1 E Bj I m e Sy G BBLKWR uo K960 D300 KI Nie ee 7 i D Jj Add X0C to the dedicated inst
101. 00000000 6 6 4 Bus Parameters ococooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 6 5 Slave Parameters 0000 0000 OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OS OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOOOOOOCOOOO 6 11 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters OOO OOOO COOOL OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOS OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOEE 6 15 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 6 3 6 6 4 Automatic refresh parameter Setup procedure eeeeseesseeeeesssesececosssseccecesssssccecoesossoseee G 15 Automatic Refresh Settings Select Areas for Update with CPU esscescescescecccccccccccccesceee G 16 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters eeeeeeseessesesesececesesccescoccccccoeocoesseososossosossosoe G 17 Number of set automatic refresh parameters eeeeesssseeseesessseecceceossocccecoossescecoosssssseee G 18 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer eR ae 6 20 CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING 7 1to7 85 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 000ooooooooooo0o00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 Program examples using automatic refresh Coccccccccccccccccccccccccccecccec cece ceccceooeooccoooooooole 6 Program example using dedicated instructions ooocoooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 Program example using the MOV instruction COCO OOO OOOO OO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOE 7 11 7 2 Program Example
102. 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 H 1 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation cococoooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000 F 2 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system cocoooooooooooocoocoooc0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 2 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system ccocococoooooocoooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 3 5 3 Part Names and Settings 0000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000 cccccccesecsoccococoosocooces F 5 5 4 Self diagnostics cococoooooocooocoooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 7 5 5 Wiring 00000000000 oo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 9 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring 0cooooooooocooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 9 5 5 2 Wiring precautions 00000000 OOO OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OOOO OOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOOOO 5 7 11 CHAPTER6 PARAMETER SETTING 6 1 to 6 20 6 1 Parameter Setting ProcedurEe secsccscccccocooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 00oo0oo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 6 3 Master Parameters 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
103. 1 26729 6869H to 26649 6819H to 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Failed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750n is OFF 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 45 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 7 5 4 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 39 Details of Program Example Item Description Service name Alarm read request with ACK DP Slave FDL address FDL address 1 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 40 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Alarm read response signal Alarm read request signal b Devices used by the user Table7 41 List of User Devices Device Description Device Description Refresh start request lt 5 Section 7 1 1 c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 42 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Mem
104. 101D X101F i Figure 7 25 Program Example for the I O Data Exchange Function When Mounted on a Remote I O Station To the next page 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network T 63 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni MO M303 m Hp 7P RENFR J K1 K1 HO K6144 DO K96 M1006 Reading input data M1006 M1007 SET Processing for failure of input data reading Ho M303 M304 i J o y hko gt 7P RENFR JO K KI HO K23040 D200 K25 M1008 Reading Slave status area M1008 M1009 SET M304 Processing for failure of Slave status area reading Aee G See ee ees Sees Pc ee eee See eet pee Game Mets a eee a fee cet ae Program for control of DP Slaves lt _ gt Section 7 1 1 2 a l a a ee a aa a a ee ee a a MO M304 k H ZP RENTO Si K1 K1 HO K14336 D100 K96 M1010 me mo a RST M303 Writing output data To M304 ary Processing for failure of A output data writing n300 2 be o m o o o m o m o m o m oo aml ee ee eee ee eee eo eie s if duie am A a a ee k E E a eee I Not required when initia
105. 1B Communication READY signal Y1B X1C Use prohibited Y1C X1D Module READY signal Y1D X1E Use prohibited WHE X1F Watchdog timer error signal Y1F Use prohibited EJPOINT Among the I O signals for the QCPU do not output turn ON the signals indicated as Use prohibited If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the PLC system may malfunction Remark eeeeeeererrererererererereerererereeeerererereee For how to use the output signals to continue or reexecute respective functions in event of system switching in the redundant system refer to Section 7 9 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 1 Data exchange start request signal Y00 data exchange start completed signal X00 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 to start I O data exchange b When I O data exchange is started after turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON The Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns OFF in any of the following cases e When the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned OFF e When an error causing stop of I O data exchange occurs e When parameters are currently being written to the QJU71PB92V from GX Configurator DP e When the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V has been changed e When a commun
106. 1PB92V is mounted on a 23648 to 23656 A Section setting area Disconnected redundant system this area is used to set the 0 R W 5C60n to 5C68x i fins 3 4 14 station detection switching target DP Slaves 23657 to 23663 System area Use prohibited 5C69x to SC6FH System switching condition When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a 23664 to 23672 i Section setting result area Disconnected redundant system this area stores the 0 R 5C70n to 5C78n i ie 3 4 14 station detection switching target DP Slaves 23673 to 23807 System area Use prohibited 5C79u to SCFFH 23808 Acyclic communication request This area is used to set which request is to be 0 RIW Section 5D00n execution instruction area executed in acyclic communications 3 4 10 23809 to 24832 Acyclic communication request This area is used to set the request data for 0 RIW Section 5D014 to 6100 area acyclic communications 3 4 10 24833 to 25119 System area Use prohibited E 61014 to 621Fx ar This area stores the request acceptance status 25120 Acyclic communication request f J Section and execution completion status in acyclic 0 R 6220n result area 3 4 10 communications 25121 to 26144 Acyclic communication response This area stores the execution result of acyclic 0 R Section 6221 to 6620n area communication 3 4 10 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequen
107. 27 Ekaterinburg Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Phone 7 34 32 532745 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 a SLOVENIA Fax 7 3432 532745 e mail info beijerfi SI 1000 Ljubljana e mail elektra etel ru UTECO A B E E GREECE Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 STC Drive Technique RUSSIA 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr Meltrade Automatika Kft 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utu utu lv LATVIA Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail info beijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 Niirensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch SWITZERLAND GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 494 3355 Fax 380 0 44 494 3366 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua Poslannikov Per 9 Str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 7210 Fax 7 095 790 7212 e mail inf
108. 2V and former models 1 Comparisons of performance specifications PROFIBUS DP station type TableApp 3 Comparisons of Performance Specifications QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D DP Master Class 1 IEC 61158 compliant DP Master Class 1 EN50170 compliant Transmission specifications Electrical standard EIA RS485 compliant Data link method characteristics Medium Shielded twisted pair cable Network topology Bus topology Tree topology when repeaters are used e Between DP lt gt Masters Token passing method e Between DP lt gt Master and DP Slave Polling method Encoding method NRZ Transmission speed Transmission distance 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 93 75kbps 187 5kbps 500kbps 1 5Mbps 3Mbps 6Mbps 12Mbps 100 m to 1200 m Differs depending on the transmission speed Max no of repeaters 3 repeaters Max no of stations Max no of DP Slaves 32 per segment including repeater s 125 per QU71PB92V 1 60 per QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D 1 In normal service mode Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes Max 32 bytes per DP Slave per DP Slave 2 In extended service mode Max 1920 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave Input data I O data size Output data 1 In normal service mode Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes Max 32 bytes per DP Slave per DP Slave 2 In extended service mode Max 1920 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave No
109. 3 Output Data Start Address Area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 0 oO ps DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 28 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 5 Slave status area This area stores the operation status of each DP Slave POINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Slave status area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP finde pp aan stat rnput Ad put Size output Ad Output Se Order of assignment E C Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expeceted to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt gt Section 6 5 3 29 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 The communication status of each DP Slave is stored in this area Initial value 0000n When the
110. 36 to Un G18431 Initial value at Bc at Bc at Bc Input data exchange awo Zee Data exchange start See request signal Y00 Wag 500 Data exchange start m a completed signal X00 SE i i ann Bus cycle time Bc Be Be Bc I O data exchange I O data exchange started stopped E Lu n Input data area for mode 3 Data of previous exchange Input data Input data Input data nA Un G6144 to Un G10239 P 9 A at BoD at Bc at Bc E lt Figure 4 2 I O Data Exchange Processing oa Remark ooo ooo coerce For program examples of the I O data exchange refer to the following g P e Single CPU system 7 3 Section 7 1 7 8 Z e Redundant system gt gt Section 7 9 1 9 eeeeeeeceoeoeeeoeeeeeeeaeseeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaee ee i n 6 a Eo 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 3 4 1 1 I O data exchange 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY eries 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information Diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on DP Slaves during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using buffer memory and I O signals The cause of errors occurring on DP Slaves can be checked on the QJ71PB92V from the diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information DP Master Class 1 The DP Slave notifies the QU71PB92V of the diagnostic information and extended diagnostic information
111. 473H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave E474H side The service not available for the specified DP Slave was E475H requested EA76H Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the DP Slave side E477H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E478H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the E480H nee ti Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry E481H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to the local station QJ71PB92V Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E482H INITIATE error response actions E483H Invalid Alignment setting Check if the specified Alignment is correct and retry o Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E484H The CommRef number is incorrect retry E490H Physical execution error detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E491H Execution error on the protocol was detected corrective actions E492H Execution error on the application was detected E4A0H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A1H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A2H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A3H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available E4A4H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E4A5H Re
112. 48 Acyclic communication response area seeeeeeeeeeee 3 49 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves seessessesse4 4 1 Address information area for mode 3 eeeseeeeeeeee 3 27 Alarm ACK rEqUES e esocccocccocccccocooccoccccocooooo 7 35 Alarm acquisition coocoooooooocoooooooooooooo000000000000 4 A Alarm area ececccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccccccccvcccces 3 50 Alarm read request signal Y18 eesssesseeeeeeeeeevee 3 15 Alarm read request with ACK seeseeseseeeceseeseese 7 40 Alarm read request without ACK seessesseeseseeeee 7 31 Alarm read response Signal X18 eseesseeseeeeeeeeee 3 15 Alarm request AVA cecccccccccccccccccccvcccecccccvcccee 3 5 Alarm FESPONSE ALEAceceeececcccccccccsccccssoccscooccs 3 50 All stations alarm Status eecccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 35 All stations diagnostic statuseessessessecseseeseeseese 3 32 Automatic Refresh Parameters seeeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeee G 15 B BBLKRD INSTtruction eeeececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccss 8 4 BBLKWR Instruction eeecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccse 3G Buffer memory list eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoce 3 17 Bus cycle TIME eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 53 Bus cycle time area eecceccccccccccccccccccccccccscsccses 3 43 Bus parameters ooooooooo0o0000000000000000000000000000000 Q C Checking the LED status on GX Developer eeeeeee 9 3 Communication READY signal X1B ssssssesseese2 3 16 Connector eeessccccooo000000000000000000000000000000000 5 Control mast
113. 4En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 Empty area Stored value 0000H An error code is stored Section 9 4 4 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 1 is stored 1 Section 9 4 4 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 A 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 2 is stored 1 lt Section 9 4 4 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 3 is stored Section 9 4 4 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 a 26489 6779H to 26528 67A0H Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26529 67A1H to 26568 67C8H Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26569 67C9H to 26608 67FOH Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26688 6840n Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No
114. 5 i Response times 150 150 150 Tait of i th station awd 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 255 Max_Tsdr ms id L m 0 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 106 4 2 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 106 2 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 108 ass Tresw ms 0 066 0 081 0 081 SE z Pto ms LHD TEHE 0 081 0 1 0 066 0 247 0 066 0 1 0 081 0 247 0 095 0 1 0 081 0 276 3 Tsdi m ms value z Request response processing time Tsi of DP Master QJ71PB92V 200 bi ae Tsdi m ms 200 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 13 E 4 Lr ms value Lr ms 5 50 3 x 100 x 10 5 80 Using the values obtained in above 2 to 4 3 gt Pta Tsdi my Lr Pt 1 Tsdi my Pt 2 Tsdi my Pt 3 Tsdi m Lr Z i 1 0 377 0 377 0 406 5 80 Z 1 16 5 80 9 6 96 Therefore the bus cycle time Bc value is as follows 3 Bc ms Max MSI 2 Pt i Tsdi v Lr Max 8 6 96 2 8 ms aie z9 Or miz AZ 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 od 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 2 When multiple DP Masters are used The bus cycle time Bc can be obtained by the following calculation formula when there are multiple DP Masters on the same network TBe ms gt Be n i 1 n Number of DP Masters Bc Bus cycle time of each DP Master gt 1 in this section The following shows an example where two DP Masters exist on the same network DP Master 1 executes poll
115. 51 notified after communication start i 2086 to 2253 System area Use prohibited 8261 to 8CDx j H H 2254 i i i Current operation mode area This area stores data of the currently operating 00011 R Section 8CEn mode 3 4 2 2255 Operation mode change request When executing the operation mode change Section request a desired operation mode is set in this FFFEx R W 8CFn area 3 4 3 area 2256 Operation mode change result This area stores the execution result of the 0 R Section 8D0x area operation mode change request 3 4 3 2257 i Local FDL address display area This area stores the FDL address of the local EFFFu R Section 8D1H station 3 4 2 2258 i i i Ofline test stat s area This area stores the details or result of the 0 R Section 8D2h offline test 3 4 2 2259 This area stores the operation mode currently Section 8D3x Flash ROM storage mode stored in the flash ROM FFFFu R 342 2260 to 2262 ae ibi nng 8D4u to 8D6x System area Use prohibited H H 2263 Control master FDL address This area stores the FDL address of the Section disblav Area control system QJ71PB92V when it is used in 2 R 3414 8D7 ied a redundant system gi 2264 Standby master FDL address This area storos ie FEE address or the F Section digblay dtea standby system QJ71PB92V when it is used in 2 R 3414 8D8x p ay a redundant system S 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read onl
116. 585 5C21n 23586 5C22n 23587 5C23n 23588 5C24n 23589 5C25n 23590 5C26n 23591 5C27u This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to Normal DP Slave by the slave parameters Initial value O000H The set data are stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON 0 Reserved or not configured station 1 Normal DP Slave b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 41 3 4 2 1 Each bit represents 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 PAS DE R 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 4 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23591 5C27n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 20 Parameter setting status area Active station Un G23584 to Un G23591 5 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Un G23592 to Address DEC HEX 23592 5C28n 23593 5C29n 23594 5C2An 23595 5C2Bx 23596 5C2Cu 23597 5C2Dn 23598 5C2En 23599 5C2Fn Un G23599 This area st
117. 5th module Results stored in Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 Address DEC HEX 615 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23048 5A08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 07 17 0 Figure 3 18 An Example in Slave Status Area Reserved Station Setting Status 3 31 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 The information on diagnostic status of each DP Slave is stored in this area When the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned OFF all the information of the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 is cleared OVERVIEW a All stations diagnostic status Un G23056 This area stores the diagnostic information detection status of all DP Slaves Initial value 0000H If diagnostic information is detected in any one of the stations in Each station s diagnostic status Un G23057 to Un G23064 1 is stored in All stations diagnostic status Un G23056 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 0 All DP Slaves normal 1 Diagnostic error information detected 7 2 O lt Q u 3 w a 2 b Each station s diagnostic status Un G23057 to Un G23064 This area stores the diagnostic information detection status of each DP Slave
118. 674En An error code is stored 3 Section 9 4 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave that returned ACK is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 bO 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750n 7 36 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b9 b13 Description Completion status of response to al
119. 6751H 2 When a value other than E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674EH Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 2 is stored lt 37 Section 9 4 4 26450 6752h 2 When a value other than E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674EH Response result Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 3 is stored lt gt Section 9 4 4 26451 6753H 2 When a value other than E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 26452 6754n to Empty area 26484 6774h Stored value 0000H 26485 6775n to Empty area 26488 6778H Stored value 0000H 26489 6779h to Empty area 26768 6890n Stored value 0000H 7 34 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING eG Q series 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request 1 Request format Table7 33 Request Format This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm ACK request The alarm ACK request is used for returning ACK to the DP Slave after execution of the alarm read request without ACK and deleting alarms in the DP Slave ACK can be returned for each alarm that was read Descripti
120. 92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station e PROGRAMMING M ALS 26 EAseries b I O data exchange program example J POINT After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Not required when initial settings are not changed me o me o we o oe o om o ow o oe o we o oe of me o me o ow o o oe o om o o oe o oe o o ON W300 XTO1B X101D X10 F XT000 Y1000 4 1 1 Hf f MOVP H2B9 D6000 Ko gt Initializing Diagnostic information invalid setting area Initializing Diagnostic information non notification time setting area l KO gt 7P RENTO J K1 K1 HO K2080 D6000 K1 M1000 M1000 M1001 SET M301 Processing for failed initialization movP K20 D6001 RENTO sl K1 K1 HO K2084 D6001 K1 M1002 M1002 M1003 M1001 M301 RST M301 M1003 Processing for failed initialization X101B X101D XI0IF X20 X10000 m 1m FMOVP KO DO K96 Writing the initial value KO gt _ 7P RENTO J1 Kl K1 HO K14336 DO K96 M1004 of output data M1004 M1005 Processing for failure of output data initial value writing yas X101B X101D X101F X20 X1000 M302 m ay Y1000 Y1000 I O data exchange start processing X1000 X101B X
121. ATIONS o Z O O Z 5 ire SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function 4 27 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 Temporary slave reservation specification and cancellation Use the temporary slave reservation function by the following procedures a Specification method 1 Set Normal DP Slaves which are to be changed to Temporary slave reservations in the temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 L gt Section 3 4 13 2 Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 3 Upon completion of the temporary slave reservation specification the results are stored in the temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 and the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON E gt Section 3 4 5 b Cancel method 1 Turn OFF the Data exchange start request signal Y00 2 In the temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 cancel the DP Slaves specified as temporary slave reservation 3 Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 4 Upon completion of the temporary slave reservation cancellation the results are stored in the temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 and the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON For program examples on the temporary slave reserva
122. Acceptance status of request instruction No 4 0 z b4 Acceptance status of request instruction No 5 0 x lu b5 Acceptance status of request instruction No 6 0 z b6 Acceptance status of request instruction No 7 0 b7 Acceptance status of request instruction No 8 0 The request completed status is stored 0 Not executed or in execution FA 1 Execution completed Bit Description Initial value z Le b8 Completion status of request instruction No 1 0 b9 Completion status of request instruction No 2 0 b10 Completion status of request instruction No 3 0 ara b11 Completion status of request instruction No 4 0 255 W w b12 Completion status of request instruction No 5 0 Pa S aod b13 Completion status of request instruction No 6 0 9 fi i b14 Completion status of request instruction No 7 0 0 b15 Completion status of request instruction No 8 0 Figure 3 31 Acyclic Communication Request Result Area Un G25120 S i n aa Lu m 0 oO 9 a oO n 6 BS ee 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 48 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 49 M ELSEG seres 4 Acyclic communication response area Un G25121 to Un G26144 The execution result of acyclic communication is stored in this area Initial value 0000n For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 4 Address DEC HEX 25121 6221h to 25248 62A0n 25249 62A1n to 25376 6320x 25377 6321n to
123. Acyclic communication request area Un G23809 to Un G24832 b Turn ON 1 the bit corresponding to the request instruction No in the Acyclic communication request execution instruction area Un G23808 c When the QJ71PB92V accepts the acyclic communication request instruction the acceptance status bit in the Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 turns ON 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM d When execution of the acyclic communication is completed the completion status bit in the Acyclic communication request result area Un G251 20 turns ON 1 and the execution result is stored in the Acyclic communication response area Un G25121 to Un G26144 POINT When acommunication fails in Class 1 services due to the following being exchanged with DP Slaves may be initialized Inputs and outputs are turned OFF e Cable fault influence of noise _ gt Sections 5 5 1 and 5 5 2 e System switching occurred in redundant system Especially when this occurs in redundant system switching outputs of the relevant DP Slaves momentarily turn OFF Therefore fully examine if the system has no problem K gt Section 7 9 4 For program examples on the acyclic communication refer to the following e Single CPU system 7 3 Section 7 4 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 4 SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z 5 ire PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRA
124. BUS DPV0 Functions 4 9 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE cries 2 Group setting The group setting can be made with the slave parameters Slave Parameter Settings in GX Configurator DP Up to eight groups groups 1 to 8 can be set Multiple groups can also be assigned to a single DP Slave Slave Parameter Settings Model QJ71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION faa Slave Properties Name Slave_Nr_001 FDL Address 1 0 125 F Watchdog min T_sdr 11 1 255 Group identification number M Gpl l Gp2 l Gp3 F Gip4 F Gp5S F Gp6 M Gip F Gps V Active I Sync Output I Freeze Input r F Swap1 0 Bytes in Master Cancel Default User Param Select Modules Figure 4 8 Group Setting GX Configurator DP 3 Executing the global control function Execute the global control function by the following procedure a Write the service to be sent and the target group to the Global control area Un G2081 b Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 c When global control processing is completed the Global control completed signal X04 turns ON If the processing failed the Global control failed signal X05 turns ON d After confirming completion of the global control turn OFF the Global control request signal Y04 4 POINT To execute the global control function to all DP Slaves including DP Slaves for which group
125. CIFICATIONS b Transmission delay time when the data consistency function is used When the data consistency function is used the transmission delay time between the QCPU and DP Slaves increases because the time waiting for read write from the QCPU or data transfer from to DP Slaves arises gt Section 3 5 2 The data consistency function can be disabled in the automatic refresh setting If this function is unnecessary disable it o Z O O Z 5 ire c When the data consistency function is enabled in the automatic refresh setting Dedicated instructions are not executable They are not processed Dedicated instructions are executable if the data consistency function is disabled in the automatic refresh setting PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION d MOV or FROM TO instruction The data consistency function is not usable when data refresh are performed between the QCPU and the QJ71PB92V buffer memory by the MOV or FROM TO instruction a PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 23 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aries 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is mounted 4 POINT 1 This setting is valid for a CPU stop error When power failure occurs in t
126. DP Master and DP Slaves and set correct parameters without ZE RSP ERR LEDON There is a DP Master or DP Slave that has duplication H a duplicated FDL address on the same line When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system reset Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting 3 Section 6 7 F122H Check the wiring status of the bus terminator s An error has been detected on the line and PROFIBUS cable s F123H RSP ERR LED ON Or some master parameter is not If the terminating resistor and PROFIBUS cable appropriate wiring status is correct increase the set value of F124H the master parameter Min slave interval Since Error action flag is check marked in the The DP Master is in the clear request master parameter settings the clear request has F125H RSP ERR LED ON a been sent to all DP Slaves transmission status oe To disable transmission of the clear request uncheck Error action flag F1FEH i ishi i FAULT LED ON Hardware failure Please Sonsult your local Mitsubishi representative F1FFH explaining a detailed description of the problem The standby master FDL address is out of Reset Switch 1 in the intelligent function module FBOOH FAULT LED ON the range switch setting lt gt Section 6 7 Reset the following items e FDL address in the master parameter setting of The FDL address of the control master is S f FBO1H FAULT LED ON uean aio e dand esis GX Configurator DP lt 37 Section 6 3 upi
127. DP Slave or contact the manufacturer Section 2 3 2 2 Multi master system configuration HSA x MSI Section 3 5 1 6 4 1 In addition to the QJ71PB92V used in the redundant system another DP Master is connected on the same PROFIBUS network 2 When using only redundant DP Slaves It may take several seconds until system switching is completed on the DP Slave side Before setting the watchdog timer of a DP Slave confirm the specifications of the DP Slave 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 37 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z 5 ire PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS 4 38 MELSEC TE eries 3 DP Slave output status when the CPUs in the control and standby systems are stopped Communication of the QJ71PB92V is stopped Since the communication is stopped a watchdog timer error may occur in the DP Slaves for which a watchdog timer is set and their outputs may be turned OFF Examples for holding the DP Slave s output are shown below Table4 14 Setting Examples for Holding DP Slave s Output Item Description When DP Slave has no Hold Clear function for output data When DP Slave has Hold Clear function for output data Disable the watchdog timer for the DP Slave Even if the Hold Clear selection for output data is not allowed for the DP
128. Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned OFF all the information of the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 is cleared OVERVIEW 0 I O data communication error or no communication including reserved temporary slave reservation and or not configured stations 1 Exchanging I O data CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 Address DEC HEX 23040 5A00H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1m Each bit indicates the n th DP Slave 23046 5A06H 23047 5A07H 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 23043 5A03x 64 63 62 61 60 no 23041 5A01H 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23042 5A02k 48 47 46 45 44 35 34 33 51 50 49 g 23044 5A04x 80 79 78 77 76 67 66 65 23045 5A05x 96 95 94 93 92 83 82 81 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23047 5A07u are fixed to 0 Figure 3 14 Slave Status Area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 FUNCTIONS Turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO updates the information in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047
129. E eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee et ee eee eee WALSAS QJ71PB92V Buffer memory SNOILVOIsIDAdS SNOILONNA Internal buffer DP Slave 1 DP Slave 2 DP Slave 3 Tres 2 dr 2 j NOILYH3dO WALSAS 340439 SONILLAS GNv s3YN0I2O0Yd z I 5 2 k E tE T AR 2 S xl a y D lo 2 5 n E o gl g g Task oO 5 z4 s 2 ke N E n gt A D cl Cy a gt IS amp g a al g c E e eee e S gt iini no oO 2 5 anna of O wm E G H E 2 Pt ra amp i EA EEEE E SOE EESE E EEEE OOE h AS A ONILLAS YJ LINWVHYd Figure 3 38 Bus Cycle Time DP Master 1 DP Slave 3 1 MSI Minimum polling cycle or Total of Treq Max_Tsdr and Tres whichever is greater is Bc Bus cycle time lt 37 1 a in this section 2 If MSI Minimum polling cycle is greater than Total of Treq Max_Tsdr and Tres the QJ71PB92V transfers data from the internal buffer to the buffer memory within the MSI Minimum polling cycle O NINWYH9O Hd SNOILONUYLSNI da voldad 3 58 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries a Bus cycle time Bc calculation formula The bus cycle time Bc of the DP Master can be obtained from the following calculation formula The symbols within the brackets indicate units Bc ms Max MSI 2 Pt i Tsdi m Lr i 1 n number of DP Slaves M
130. ECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA eries 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations The following are the precautions when using the QJ71PB92V on MELSECNET H remote I O stations 1 2 3 4 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh is not available when the QJU71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station To use the automatic refresh mount the QJ71PB92V on a remote master station QCPU Dedicated instructions BBLKWR BBLKRD Dedicated instructions BBLKWR BBLKRD cannot be used when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station To use dedicated instructions mount the QJ71PB92V on a remote master station QCPU QJ71PB92V parameter setup To set QJ71PB92V parameters connect GX Configurator DP to a remote I O station QJ71PB92V parameters cannot be set via a remote master station FDT DTM technology To use the FDT DTM technology first connect the FDT CommDTM to a remote I O station The FDT DTM technology cannot be used via a remote master station 2 1 Applicable System 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET remote I O stations 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC KE eries 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration OVERVIEW 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network N This section explains t
131. EDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le eries 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm read request with ACK 1 Request format Table7 36 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value 26432 6740H Set a request code Set value 1502H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm is to be read 26433 6741h Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Empty area Write 0000H 26434 6742h Set value Fixed to 0000H T7 40 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674EH Stored value A502H 26447 674EH The FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm was read is stored Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO L_a gt 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion
132. ETTING eR X PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 14 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 15 MELSEC TA eries 11 Alarm read request signal Y18 Alarm read response signal X18 a Turn ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 when reading alarms on the specified DP Slave according to the information set in the Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 b Turning ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 clears the information in the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 Note however that the information in the following areas are not cleared when the alarm ACK request request code 15011 is executed Table3 7 Areas Not Cleared At Alarm ACK Request Execution Buffer Memory Address Description DEC HEX 26449 to 26484 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 1 is stored 6751H to 6774H 26489 to 26524 6489 t0205 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 2 is stored 6779H to 679CH 26529 to 26564 6529 t0656 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 3 is stored 67A1H to 67C4H 2 to 26604 0369 t0266 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 4 is stored 67C9H to 67ECH 2 to 26644 6603 t0 266 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 5 is stored 67F1H to 6814H 26649 to 26684 Renee Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 6 is stored 6819H to 683CH 2 to 26724 E A Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 7 is
133. F Writes tracking transferred data to Output data area Writes the initial output data value I O data exchange start processing BBLKRD execution Reading input data Reads Slave status area BBLKWR execution Writing output data Figure 7 36 I O Data Exchange Program Example Dedicated Instructions 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 77 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries POINT Confirm that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled F Section 6 3 When the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled dedicated instructions are not processed Master Settings Module QU71PBS2V0 os a Revision Daa Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION pes Name PROFIBUS Master Baudkate i5Mbps x FDL address jo 10 125 Head address on PLC 0 00 OFE Enor action flag F Goto Clear State Min slave interval jo 65595 Polling timeout 50 1 65535 Data control time fioo 1 65535 T Watchdog Watchdog for time sync e 10 65535 cancel qet f gt Buram Make sure the box is unchecked 7 78 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples onan o
134. H H ai HOY H2B9 pr KO I Moy KO i L rHOy H1 i L py H2 3 a a eae I E ke EE ay Seen OWE SN A SO Mana eee eter OY RY FWov Ho kayo UO Buoy D100 G14336 1D XIF x20 x0 uoy G14336 a a Te Ko YO M400 UO G2080 UO G2084 UO G23648 UO G23649 UO G23608 M400 UO G2080 UO G2084 UO G23648 UO G23649 UO G23608 K96 C10 Pf p_ KR uo K14336 G BBLKRD UO K6144 UO BMOY 623040 DO D200 D100 CHO K96 K25 XO X1B X1D XIF J ita 11 Lt ii l NO n G p XOG HO Program for DP Slave control gt gt Section 7 1 1 2 a N a ee a A a e S XOC K96 Program for reading diagnostic information lt _ 3 Section 7 1 1 2 b Ni i a a a a se ree Turn ON the initial setting execution command Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area I l l Sets conditions for system switching Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation Turn OFF the initial setting execution command Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non notification time setting area Sets conditions for system switching Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation Turns OFF YOO to Y1
135. HI ELECTRIC CORPORATION pes Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 5Mbps z FDL address Poo mg Head address on PLC o o O0 OFE Enor action flag I Goto Clear State Min slave interval jeo 1 65535 100ps Poling timeout po 11 6555 1 ms Data control time fho 1 65535 10ms I Watchdog pue T Autom Refresh fetat BusPaam Watchdog for time sync 0 65535 10ms COR Cancel Make sure the box is unchecked 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with a DP Slave using the MOV instruction This program example is based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 e Not needed when the initial setting is not changed A ae sT moo Aim ON the initial setting execution command M400 X1B XID XIF x0 Yo UO Initializes Diagnostic info H 1 Ik at ar at Mov Hebe ae y invalid setting area i UO Initializes Diagnostic info non uov K20 62084 notification time setting area UO Specifies the 2nd temporar I Specifies the emporary hov H2 aa slave reservation l RST 4400 1Turn OFF the initial setting J execution command X1B X1D XIF X20 x0 UO a L m a ae FHOVP KO 614336 K9 Writes the initial output data value cyo I O data exchange
136. IONS 3 11 MELSEC TE eries 5 Global control failed signal X05 a If the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON while the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is OFF both the Global control completed signal X04 and Global control failed signal X05 turn ON b The ON status of the Global control failed signal X05 means that the global control has failed Remedy the cause of the error and execute the global control again c Turning OFF the Global control request signal Y04 turns OFF the Global control failed signal X05 Global control request Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed Global control completed signal X04 Global control failed Global control failed signal X05 Figure 3 5 Global Control Failed Signal X05 For details on the global control refer to Section 4 1 3 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 6 Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 when reading the extended diagnostic information of the FDL address specified in the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 b Turning ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 clears the information
137. IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 I 20041 Agrate Brianza Ml Phone 39 039 60 53 1 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 e mail factory automation it mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubi 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 622 160 60 Fax 81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 GEVA AUSTRIA UAB UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Kazpromautomatics Ltd KAZAKHSTAN Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu pr 187 2 Scladskaya Str AT 2500 Baden LT 2053 Vilnius KAZ 470046 Karaganda Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Phone 7 3212 50 11 50 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 52322 980 Fax 7 3212501150 e mail office geva at e mail powel utu lt e mail info kpakz com TEH
138. J71PB92V QJ71PB92D etc A device that communicates with DP Slaves and checks their FDL address settings and or DP Master Class 2 operation states The DP Master Class 2 is used as a DP Master for supervising the network which can start maintain and diagnose the system DP Slave A device that exchanges I O data with a DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater A device used to connect different segments of PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator A terminating resistor that is connected to either end of each segment on PROFIBUS DP Configuration tool Software used to set bus parameters slave parameters etc and to write them to a DP Master GX Configurator DP etc GSD file An electronic file that contains parameters of a DP Slave The GSD file is used to set up the slave parameters on GX Configurator DP FDL address The numbers assigned to a DP Master and DP Slaves The FDL address is set within the range from 0 to 125 Bus parameter The parameter used for the communication setting of PROFIBUS DP The bus parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP Master parameter The parameter used for the settings FDL address transmission speed etc of the QJ71PB92V The master parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP Slave parameter The parameter for a DP Slave which is set on the DP Master The slave parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP The setting items are described on the GSD File
139. M OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni b When failed Table7 32 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26446 674EH An error code is stored lt gt Section 9 4 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave from which the alarm was read is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 See below Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 bO 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed eens Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 1 is stored lt 3 Section 9 4 4 26449
140. MELSEG Fl caries CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the QU71PB92V 2 1 Applicable System The QJ71PB92V can be used with the modules and software packages shown below 1 Applicable modules and their quantities The following table summarizes the CPU modules and network modules for remote I O for which the QJ71PB92V can be mounted and the number of mountable modules Table2 1 Applicable Modules and Their Quantities No of Mountable Applicable Module Remarks Modules QOO0JCPU Max 8 QOOCPU 1 742 733 Max 24 Q01CPU QO02CPU QO2HCPU Mountable in Q mode only QO6HCPU Max 64 P 4 4278 cela Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QJU72LP25 25 Network module nian Max 64 5 QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 Max 64 41 2 3 Max 11 1 2 4 1 Refer to the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 The number of mountable modules is restricted depending on the automatic refresh setting on the QJ71PB92V For details refer to Section 6 6 4 3 To utilize the data consistency function and dedicated instructions use a QCPU whose first 5 digits of the serial No is 02092 or later 4 Use the QJ71PB92V of function version D or later 5 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 2 Applicable base units The QJ71PB92V can be mounted in any I O
141. MMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 13 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aries 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have been generated on any DP Slave DP Master Class 1 Power QU71 supply QCPU pgg2 module I Alarm generation DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 8 Figure 4 10 Alarm Acquisition 1 Requests available on the QJ71PB92V There are the following two ways for acquiring alarms using the Alarm read request without ACK and Alarm ACK request and using the Alarm read request with ACK Whether the DP Slave supports this function or not can be checked in the GSD file For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave a Alarm read request without ACK Alarm ACK request Use these requests when a certain time may be required to return ACK after reading an alarm from a DP Slave e g when taking corrective actions for the DP Slave error The Alarm ACK request enables ACK to be returned for each read out alarm m Alarm generation The alarm is read from the DP Slave Alarm read request without ACK Take corrective actions for the error that occurred on the DP Slave ACK is returned to the alarm for which processing is
142. ND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Type QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Mas ter Module General term Abbreviation Description QJ71PB92V Abbreviation of the model QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module PROFIBUS DP Abbreviation of PROFIBUS DP network MELSECNET H Abbreviation of MELSECNET H network system QCPU Generic term for the QOOJCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU CPU module Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU GX Developer Generic term for the product name SWnD5C GPPW E n 4 or later Configuration tool for QJ71PB92V GX Configurator DP Generic term of the product model SWnD5C PROFID E n 7 or later GLOSSARY This part explains the glossary used in this manual Term PROFIBUS DPVO Description A basic version of PROFIBUS DP The following functions are executable e I O data exchange e Diagnostic information notification etc PROFIBUS DPV1 A PROFIBUS DP version for which the following functions have been added to the basic functionality of PROFIBUS DPVO e Acyclic communication e Alarm function etc PROFIBUS DPV2 A PROFIBUS DP version for which the following functions have been added to the PROFIBUS DPV1 functionality e Time stamping etc Class 1 A device exchanging I O data with a DP Slaves Q
143. NIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 Cuza Voda 36 1 81 Lva Tolstogo Str 7 Off 311 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2061 Chisinau RU 197376 St Petersburg Phone 375 0 17 210 4626 Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 375 0 17 210 4626 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 7 812 1183 239 e mail tehnikon belsonet net e mail intehsis mdl net e mail as avtsev spb ru Koning amp Hartman B V BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman B V NETHERLANDS Consys Researchpark Zellik Pontbeeklaan Donauweg 2 B Promyshlennaya St 42 RUSSIA 43 NL 1000 AK Amsterdam RU 198099 St Petersburg BE 1731 Brussels Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Phone 7 812 325 3653 Phone 32 0 2 467 17 44 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 Fax 7 812 147 2055 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 48 e mail info koningenhartman com e mail consys consys spb ru e mail info koningenhartman com_ Beijer Electronics A S NORWAY Electrotechnical RUSSIA TELECON CO BULGARIA Teglverksveien 1 Systems Siberia Andrej Ljapchev Lbvd Pb 21 4 N 3002 Drammen Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 Phone 7 3832 119598 Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 e mail info beijer no Fax 7 3832 119598 e mail MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND mail info eltechsystems ru AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC ul Sliczna 36 Elektrostyle RUSSIA Control Systems s r o PL 31 444 K
144. Not checked Enables Error action flag setting Checked Disables Error action flag setting Check this checkbox so that the DP Master resends parameters to DP Slaves when the DP Master is Initialize slave when restored from the status of a communication error failing to respond Not checked Not resend parameters to DP Slaves Checked Resends parameters to DP Slaves Check this checkbox to set the Slave Watchdog time unit to 1 ms FUNCTIONS This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Watchdog timebase 1ms This setting is available when the master parameter Watchdog is unchecked Not checked 10 ms units Checked 1 ms units Check this checkbox to place the DP Slave into the Fail Safe status when the DP Master sends a clear request Fail Safe function This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function enable For the Fail Safe setting refer to the manual for the DP Slave Not checked Not placed into Fail Safe status Checked Placed into Fail Safe status Check this checkbox when the parameter check method for the DP Slave is different from that of the PROFIBUS standard Slave specific check of This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function cfg_data For the parameter check method refer to the manual for the DP Slave Not checked Checks parameters based on the PROFIBUS standard Checked Checks parameters by the DP Slave specific method
145. OFIBUS cable RxD TxD P red 6 i RxD TxD N green o be as Figure 5 6 PROFIBUS Cable Wiring Specifications M 6 z 3 Connector S Use a D sub 9 pin male connector for the PROFIBUS cable i The applicable screw size is 4 40 UNC e 4 Wiring specifications for bus terminator When the QJ71PB92V is a terminal station use a connector with built in bus terminator that meets the following wiring specifications 2 O VP 6 o z Ry 390Q 2 min1 4W ol RxD TxD P 3 o Ria 2200 2 min1 4W RxD TxD N 8 o zZ ore ESO fy wi i ro AGS near SEG Ww gt ann Ra 3902 2 min1 4w DGND 5 o _ _ Figure 5 7 Wiring Specifications for Bus Terminator 5 PROFIBUS equipment The PROFIBUS cables connectors and other PROFIBUS equipment must be purchased or obtained at user s discretion For details on PROFIBUS equipment access the following website e PROFIBUS International http www profibus com PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 5 Wiring 5 10 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC Cel ries 5 5 2 Wiring precautions As one of the requirements to give full play to QJU71PB92V s functions and make up the system with high reliability it is necessary to have an external wiring unsusceptible to an influence of noise The following gives the precautions for external wirin
146. OM initialization TEST Section 9 5 Flashing Executing self diagnostics Section 5 4 Z OFF Not executing self diagnostics or flash ROM initialization 5 ra ON R Token being passed 8 TOKEN Flashing 5 OFF No token passing or being in the standby system ON Operating in Parameter setting mode mode 1 ouy Mh o S a A A a cme PRM SET Flashing ie A Section 6 2 F Q z Operating in operation mode other than Parameter setting mode mode 1 w Wi wi OFF 596 ON An error has occurred Section 9 1 a 2 ii FAULT SET OFF Normally operating pane 1 The LED flashes at intervals based on the value set in Data control time in Master Parameters 2 The LED flashes at the time of request or response in acyclic communication 3 The LED status during token passing varies depending on the number of DP Masters within the S same network and the transmission speed setting as shown the Table 5 4 E n aa Table5 4 TOKEN LED Status E No of DP Masters within the Transmission Speed Same Network 19 2kbps or less 93 75kbps or more 1 ON More than 1 Flashing ON or OFF o CZ 2 g fe a feu Yn a ES Q B2 5 3 Part Names and Settings 5 6 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEG Fl caries 5 4 Self diagnostics The self diagnostics of the QJ71PB92V performs a unit test on the QJ71PB92V It takes about 15 seconds to complete the self diagnostics 1 Sel
147. ON are ignored 7 Z O lt iS u w a Oo FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION S z WwW n eeeeeeeaeeaeseeoeseeseeeeoeoeaeoeeeeoeaeeeoeeoee eee eaeae ee eeae ee ees oc Ei The time remaining time during which no diagnostic information is notified after z communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON can be checked in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 Z g S f DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 36 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 2 Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 This area stores the remaining time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON initial value 0 seconds The non notification time is set in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 Table3 16 Current diagnostic Information Non notification Time Area Un G2085 A countdown time remaining time during which no diagnostic information 0 to 65535 is notified is stored Unit seconds No diagnostic information is notified until the value reaches 0 When the time set in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 has elapsed after communication start after Data exchange start completed
148. P Slave 1 Set Input CPU Device and or Output CPU Device when changing the refresh target devices of I O data on a per DP Slave basis When these settings have been made be sure to check Slave Specific Transfer on the Select Areas for Update with CPU screen lt _ gt Section 6 6 2 2 To refresh I O data of all DP Slaves into the same kind of device use Block Transfer on the Select Areas for Update with CPU screen 3 Section 6 6 2 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG lA orie b DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Screen DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Alarms F lohore AutoClear M Update Alarm F Ihitialize slave when failing to respond F Status Alarm Watchdog timebase Tms Manufacturer Specific Alarm Gail Safe function enabled F Diagnostic Alan OVERVIEW F Slave specific check of chg_data T Process Alarm Pull Plug Alar r Lase Figure 6 6 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Screen CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Setting Items Item Description Check this box to disable the clear request transmission when a diagnostic error is detected on this DP SPECIFICATIONS Slave even though the master parameter Error action flag is enabled Check this checkbox to disable the Error action flag setting in the master parameters Ignore AutoClear i ar i BE This setting is available when the Error action flag setting in the master parameters is enabled
149. Power QJ71 supply QCPU pBg2v module DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Diagnostic error occurred Extended diagnostic error occurred Figure 4 3 Acquisition of Diagnostic and or Extended Diagnostic Information 1 Procedure for acquiring diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information The following shows the procedure for acquiring diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information Generation of diagnostic information The RSP ERR LED turns ON The diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON Check the station that sent the diagnostic oar Thi tion 2 information L7 This section 2 The diagnostic information sent from the DP Slave is read from the QJ71PB92V buffer L gt This section 3 memory Is extended diagnostic information stored in the DP Slave Checking method lt gt This section 4 a No Yes The extended diagnostic information is read from the DP Slave F This section 4 Check the cause of the error from the diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information and take corrective actions Figure 4 4 Acquisition of Diagnostic and or Extended Diagnostic Information 4 4 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries 2 Checking the station generating diagnostic information T
150. Q Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Extended diagnostic information read areaeeseese 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read request Arca cecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccvccccccscoocooce 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 000000000 COO OOOOO OO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OO OOO OO OOOOCOOOOO 3 1 2 Extended diagnostic information read response Arca ceccccccccccccccccccccvcccccccccvcccecccccecccccccccece 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 cooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000 3 12 F FDT DTM technology ocoooooooooooo00000000000000000000 _ 1G Flash ROM storage mode ocoooooooooooooo000000000000 3 21 Function Version ccoooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000 2 13 Functions C0000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 1 G Global control area eececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccece 3 44 Global control completed signal X04 ceeeeeeeeeeee 3 10 Global control failed signal X05 esesseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 11 Global Control TUNCTION eeeeeccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 4 7 Global control request signal YO4 eesceseeeeeeeeeee 3 10 H How to return the QJ71PB92V to Its factory set conditions ccooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000009 0 24 I INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE eseeseeseesees 7 22 Input data area for mode 3 ccceccccccccccccccvooscees 3 25 Input data start address area for mode 3 eesee 3 28 I O data exchange eecccccc
151. RES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 5 Processing Time 3 62 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 When the data consistency function is enabled The reading writing I O data by automatic refresh is set data consistency function enabled or dedicated instructions the transmission delay time is as shown below a Output data delay time Table3 28 Output Data Delay Time Data consistency function enabled Item Condition Transmission Delay Time Normal value p Scan Bc Scanx2 lt Bc Bcx3 Max value Scanx 2 gt Bc Scanx 2 Bcx2 b Input data delay time Table3 29 Input Data Delay Time Data consistency function enabled Item Condition Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Scanx2 lt Bc Scan Bc Max value Scan lt Bc lt Scanx 2 Scan Bcx2 Scan gt Bc Scanx3 3 63 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system This is the time taken from when the control system QJ71PB92V sends a system ai switching request to the redundant CPU until control is started with another QJ71PB92V in i a new control system z System A System A System B System B QJ71PB92V Redundant CPU Redundant CPU QJ71PB92V l l 5 Control system Control system Standby system Standby system fa 3 Zz System
152. Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING Device MELSEC TE eries 4 Assignment of devices in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 60 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Description Device Description X1000 Data exchange start completed signal Y1000 Data exchange start request signal X101B Communication READY signal X101D Module READY signal X101F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 61 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X20 I O data exchange start command SB20 Network module status X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word SB47 Host baton pass status X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word SB49 Host data link status MO Refresh start request SW 70 0 Other station baton pass status M1 For MC instruction SW74 0 Other station data link status M300 ON for 1 scan only after start of communication SW78 0 Other station parameter communication status M301 For REMTO REMEPR instruction interlock TO to T4 For MELSECNETHH interlock M302 For holding I O data exchange run M303 For REMTO REMEPR instruction interlock M304 For REMTO REMEPR instruction interlock M1000 REMTO instructio
153. S DP The QJ71PB92V operates as a DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP networks lt Single CPU system gt DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave MELSEC ST system DP Slave Z g je ma ea aa pee Bus terminator oon iam Bus terminator lt Redundant system gt Redundant CPU Q25PRHCPU DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V Control system a Standby system lt ooo0 oonoo0 Sie Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave QJ71PB93D MELSEC ST System LLLA Weacoge DP Slave o0 onon Bus terminator Figure 1 1 PROFIBUS DP Using QJ71PB92V OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS OVERVIEW MIELSEC TA eries lt MELSECNET H remote I O network gt Remote master station QU71LP21 25 ese leo lea MELSECNET H Remote I O network Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V T MM A 5 DP Slave DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave MELSEC ST System
154. SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 54 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 55 MELSEC TA eries 3 System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system this area is used to set the switching target DP Slaves Initial value 0000H a System switching condition Un G23648 Set AND or OR as a condition for the setting in the System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 0 ORcondition If a communication error occurs on any of the specified DP Slaves the systems are switched 1 AND condition If a communication error occurs on all of the specified DP Slaves the systems are switched b System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 Set the target DP Slaves for the system switching Initial value 0000H 0 Not system switching target 1 System switching target Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23654 5C66H 23655 5C67H 23656 5C68H 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 1 1 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b12 of address 23656 5C68n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 35 System sw
155. Startup procedure Parameters PLC parameter lt lt I O assignment gt gt Detailed setting button Stop vi gt a rl x E2 i Figure 4 24 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error GX Developer n Zz O O A ire 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA cries 2 Output status for the case of a CPU stop error a When Error time output mode is set to Clear The QJ71PB92V stops I O data exchange when a CPU stop error occurs Due to stop of I O data exchange no output data is sent to DP Slaves Input data received from a DP Slave before stop of I O data exchange are held in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V I O data exchange is stopped Astop error f occurred DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 25 When Error time output mode is Set to Clear EJPOINT Whether or not output data are output from each DP Slave to external devices after stop of I O data exchange differs depending on the setting of the DP Slave For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave b When Error time output mode is set to Hold The QJ71PB92V continues I O data exchange when a CPU stop error occurs The data before occurrence of the CPU stop error are held and they are sent to the DP Slaves Input data received from DP Slaves updates th
156. TENE Section 6 5 Z F nw OED Use the automatic Too refresh function Section 6 6 Set the automatic refresh parameter o zZ E lu o x W E W Write the parameters set on GX Configurator DP to QJ71PB92V GX Configurator DP Operating Manual e 2 in this section 1 To the next page Figure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 1 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Kel ries No Is the QU71PB92V mounted to a redundant system Set the standby master FDL address in GX Developer Pog Section 6 7 Write the parameters set on GX Developer to a redundant system i is aac GX Developer Operating Manual Figure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure Continued 2 Precautions for using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system and writing parameters through GX Configurator DP a Parameter writing from GX Configurator DP When writing parameters from GX Configurator DP the write target varies depending on the operation mode of the redundant CPU Table6 1 Parameter Writing from GX Configurator DP Target for parameter writing One system to which GX Remarks Both systems A and B Configurator DP is connected a When parameters are written the operation mode Backup mode O x of the redundant CPU is changed to Separate mode and tracking transfer is stopped The tracking t
157. The devices that store output data are Devices that are set as the automatic refresh target of output data in the automatic refresh setting Devices that are used to store data in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 Devices whose data are specified as write data of the BBLKWR instruction Tracking transfer is performed only for the devices that store output data Tracking transfer of all areas is not needed Table7 71 Tracking Transfer Devices in the I O Data Exchange Program Example D100 to I O data exchange start command D195 Output data b Devices whose data are tracking transferred by DP Slave control programs Devices which are specified as conditions for writing output data are tracked Table7 72 Tracking Transfer Devices in the DP Slave Control Program Example Device Description Device Description Conditions for write to output data 1st word X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word c Devices whose data are tracking transferred by programs for reading diagnostic information Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 is turned ON e Start command device by which the Diagnostic information area clear request signal YO2 is turned ON Table7 73 Devices Tracked in the Program Example for Reading Diagnostic Information Device Description Device Communication error detect
158. Tsw ms Tam Trc aw ms System switching processing time lt 53 gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Tsw ms Tam ms Automatic refresh time of QJ71PB92V lt 37 QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals e Trc ms Tracking data loading time by standby system CPU lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Internal processing time of the QJ71PB92V Tp ms Total number of bytes for I O data lengths of all DP Slaves x Time Corresponding to Tp ms f Transmission Speed 1 2 No of connected DP Slaves X Time Corresponding to Transmission Speed 22 Common processing time 2 Scan ms Scan time of the redundant CPU lt 53 gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Number of switching target DP Slaves that are specified in the system switching DP Slave Nand specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 when AND is set in the System switching condition area Un G23648 1 The I O data length of each DP Slave can be confirmed on the Slave Modules screen of GX Configurator DP lt gt GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 2 The time differs as shown below depending on the transmission speed Table3 31 Time Corresponding to Transmission Speed renee Time Corresponding to Time Corresponding to r y Transmission speed AA ae Common Processing time Transmission Speed 1 Transmission Speed 2 9 6kbps 0 9 ms 1 8 ms 500 ms 19 2kbps 0 6 m
159. Un G26812 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 d Read the execution result from the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and turn OFF the Time control start request signal Y19 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo e Turning OFF the Time control start request signal Y19 turns OFF the Time control start response signal X19 For details on time control over DP Slaves refer to Section 4 3 1 eeeeeeeeeaoeseeeeoeeeaeeeoeaoeseeeeeeseeoevaeeeaeoeeeaoeaeeeaeaseeeeeoeeea ee FUNCTIONS 13 Communication READY signal X1B a The Communication READY signal X1B turns ON when the Module READY signal X1D turns ON and I O data exchange is ready to be started The signal turns ON only in the Communication mode mode 3 b The signal turns OFF when an error disabling I O data exchange occurs on the QJ71PB92V PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION c Use the signal as an interlock signal for when turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 14 Module READY signal X1D PARAMETER SETTING a This signal turns ON when the QJ71PB92V is started up This signal turns ON regardless of the operation mode b This signal turns OFF when the QJ71PB92V goes down 15 Watchdog timer error signal X1F a This signal turns ON when a watchdog timer error occurs on the QJU71PB92V PROGRAMMING b The Watchdog timer error signal X1F does not turn OFF u
160. VERVIEW 1 Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 The time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON is set in this area Initial value 20 seconds CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table3 15 Diagnostic Information Non notification Time Setting Area Un G2084 Set Value Description Set the time during which diagnostic information is not notified Unit seconds OO 0 to 65535 This setting prevents temporary error detection e g when turning ON a DP Slave after turning ON the QJ71PB92V When diagnostic information is generated within the time duration set by this setting the conditions are as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e No error code and detailed data is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G2307 to Un G23321 and or Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 E POINT Set a value into the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 when the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal YOO
161. VIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 indexe r ada Link Status Taput Ader input Size output adar output size Order of assignment a 6144 18 14336 18 oe pea 6153 14345 Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expeceted to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt gt Section 6 5 FUNCTIONS 3 Input data of a DP Slave which has failed in I O data exchange are not stored in the Input data area of the QJ71PB92V Data stored before the fault are held in the relevant Input data area for the DP Slave 1 DP Slave corresponding to the bit that is turned OFF in the Slave status area Normal communica tion detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 24 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 Input data area for mode 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 input data from DP Slaves are stored in this area a Data leng
162. ZR K H T ST C D W 1 Available devices are given in the Constant field in each section 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS M als 26 Fel series 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 1 Before executing a dedicated instruction gt Before executing a dedicated instruction be sure to confirm the following z a Turn ON the Data consistency start request signal YOC Before executing a dedicated instruction turn ON the Data consistency start request signal YOC Z Attempting to execute a dedicated instruction with the Data consistency start z request signal YOC OFF will result in non processing non execution o p Use the Data consistency requesting signal XOC as an interlock for execution of 28 dedicated instructions Execution command a yoc 4 2 xoc z GP BBLKRD U0 K6144 DO K960 g N Figure 8 1 Interlock Example for Dedicated Instruction b Check that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled If the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled use of dedicated instructions is not allowed They are not processed x Dedicated instructions are executable if the data consistency function is disabled O in the automatic refresh setting gt Section 6 3 5 Master Settings Module QU71PB92v 3 Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Bevin 9 ied 2 KO Name PROFIBUS Master a mi Lu Baudrate 15 Mbps v i FDL address A E D am
163. a exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON c Section 3 4 13 OVERVIEW 0 Normal DP Slave reserved or not configured station 1 Temporary slave reservation Address DEC HEX 615 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23600 5C30H 23601 5C31H 23602 5C32u 23603 5C33H 23604 5C34n CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Each bit represents the n th DP Slave oO 23605 5C35x 23606 5C36x 23607 5C37H 7 2 O lt Q u 3 w a 2 D oS SS SS SS 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23607 5C374 are fixed to 0 Figure 3 22 Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 34 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 3 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 35 MELSEC TE cries 7 Slave status area Alarm detection Un G26416 to Un G26424 The information on alarm status of each DP Slave is stored in this area Address DEC HEX 26417 6731 i 26418 67321 26419 6733H 26420 6734H 26421 6735 26422 6736n 26423 6737H 26424 6738H b15 a b lt b14 b13 b12 b11 All stations alarm status Un G26416 This area stores the alarm detection status of all DP Slaves Initial value 00001 If an alarm is detected in any one of the stations in Each station s alarm st
164. aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Master Module Art 1665 10 06 2006 n a aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version B ersion SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module used In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions DANGER aie ae resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions A CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage w e e e e e e Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS When a communication error occurs on PROFIBUS DP the status of the faulty station is as shown below Create an interlock circ
165. acking transferred Figure 7 29 Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the Control System Before System Switching eeeeeeeaeaeseeoeaeoeeeeceeaoeaeoeeoeoeseeeaeoeaeeoeeeeeeecoeoes eae eee ee 8 1 Figure 7 29 is an example for using a dedicated instruction 2 When using the automatic refresh output data in the specified auto refresh target devices are tracking transferred e Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system After system switching The tracking transferred output data are written to the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 This processing is not needed when the automatic refresh is used ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SH1518 X1B XID KIF aaa UDA if pwOY D100 614336 K96 Tracking transferred output data are written to Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 Figure 7 30 Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the New Control System After System Switching T 68 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Precautions a Operation mode change To change the operation mode of the QU71PB92V set the redundant CPU in Separate or Debug mode and refer to the program example in Section 7 1 1 2 c For precautions for changing the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 6 2 OVERVIEW gt
166. acyclic communication with DP Slaves and if an error occurs states of communication with DP Slaves are initialized Inputs and outputs are turned OFF b When using Class 2 service If system switching occurs before execution of the ABORT service the INITIATE service is not completed normally in the new control system In this case after the time for the INITIATE service transmission timeout has elapsed execute the INITIATE service again 7 82 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition If a system switching occurs the function of the alarm acquisition cannot be continued ai In redundant systems do not use the alarm acquisition i To use the function pay attention to the this section and fully examine the possible 2 operations in advance 1 After the system switching Z After the system switching only the alrms that is newly generated after the switching can be obtained mie 7A When system switching occurs in the redundant system the alarms that have been 38 obtained before the system switching cannot be read out in the new control system 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves e Fa If a system switching occurs during execution of the time control function the processing O cannot be continued a The following explains
167. ad completion status of the alarm data is stored Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750n 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Description Bit Description Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 12 data No 5 b8 0 Failed or not executed b 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b9 data No 2 b13 data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b10 data No 3 b14 data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion
168. ad error was detected on the DP Slave side E421H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E422H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E423H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available E424H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side Request not supported error was detected on the DP Slave E425H side E426H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E427H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E428H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E429 i PER detecied oa me DPS id correctly set or not and retry A NDOTO ee NPS WAS CPPP RTRT et eee For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E42AH Access to an access disabled area was attempted from the DP Slave side E42BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E42CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side E42DH Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave side E42EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E42FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP E430H Slave side To the next page 9 4 Error Codes 9 13 9 4 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication 10 Z e e I v wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE cries Error codes E431H
169. address of the target DP Slave Set value 00x to 7DH 0 to 125 2 Set CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value 00x to 7Ex 0 to 126 0 to 126 2 2H Set the length of the data to read Unit byte Set value 1 to 240 3 3H Set the slot No to read Set value 0 to 254 4 4H Set the index to read Set value 0 to 255 5 5H to 127 7FH T 16 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE Empty area Write 0000H Set value Fixed to 0000H PROGRAMMING Offset Address Result 0 0H 2 Response format MELSEC TE eries a When normally completed OVERVIEW Table7 16 Response Format When Normally Completed A response code is stored 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE Stored value A400H 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE Stored value A410H 1 1H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 SPECIFICATIONS 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00x to 7Ex 0 to 126 2 2H FUNCTIONS The length of the read data is stored Unit byte S
170. after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Alarm data No 1 Stored value 0 to 31 The alarm data are stored b15 b8 b7 bO 26453 6755x Alarm data 2nd byte Alarm data 1st byte 26453 6755n to 26454 6756n Alarm data 4th byte Al data 3rd byt 26484 6774H 4th byte arm data 3rd byte to 26484 6774y Alarm data 64th byte Alarm data 63rd byte 26485 6775n to Empty area 26488 6778n Stored value 0000H 26489 6779 t Hite Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0h 26529 67A1h t Dio Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9H to 26608 67F0H 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 4 Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 Same as alarm data No 1 26688 6840nH Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869H to 26649 6819H to 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 33 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTE
171. al overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by r
172. am Example 8 7 8 3 BBLKWR Instruction Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 26 Fel series CHAPTER9 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the troubleshooting and error codes of the QJ71PB92V Before troubleshooting the QJ71PB92V check that no errors have occurred on the QCPU or MELSECNET H remote I O network If any error is identified check the error details and take corrective actions For the troubleshooting in Sections 9 1 to 9 3 refer to the following flowchart 10 Z e e I v Lu l a O n Troubleshooting o S Lu jek lt Do the LEDs indicate an error status i a ae IED on Check the error indicated by LEDs and take corrective TOKEN LED OFF actions lt 3 Section 9 1 lt PRM SET LED Flashing FAULT LED ON in Q z Troubleshooting when communication with DP Slaves is not possible lt gt Section 9 2 Unable to communicate with DP Slaves Is the QU71PB92V mounted Yes to the single CPU system For the QU71PB92Vs used in the redundant system has the following error occurred Output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching FAULT LED of QJ71PB92V in new standby system is ON When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching gt Section 9 3 1 and 9 3 2 When the QJ71PB92V is used in the redundant system is mainte
173. an error the control and Sedionae i function standby systems are switched each other to continue communications o ZA 2 g fo fe a RS Yn a ES Q HZ 4 FUNCTIONS ELSECTE ories 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions 4 1 1 I O data exchange The QJ71PB92V can operate as a DP Master Class 1 on the PROFIBUS DP system and perform I O data exchange with DP Slaves Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling the exchange of I O data up to 8192 bytes 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system QCPU QJ71PB92V Davies Buffer memory Reading of se eh Mom inputdata Input data area for mode 3 Y Device Writing of e to output data G tp t d ta area for mode 3 Input data No input data Input data e eee0e8 Output data Output data No output data DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 125 Figure 4 1 I O Data Exchange 1 Reading writing I O data a Buffer memory Read or write I O data from the following buffer memory in the QJ71PB92V e Input data Input data area for mode 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 e Output data Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 b Read write methods Read or write I O data from the buffer
174. ardware failure of the QJ71PB92V Please No consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Is the RUN LED on QJ71PB92V ON Yes lt When the PRM SET LED is ON gt No Change the QJ71PB92V s operation mode to Communication mode mode 3 I gt Section 6 2 lt When the PRM SET LED is flashing gt Set the parameters lt gt gt Chapter 6 No Check the Local station error information area and take corrective actions Is the PRM SET LED on QJ71PB92V OFF Yes Is the FAULT LED on QJ71PB92V OFF Yes 1 Figure 9 3 Troubleshooting When Communications with DP Slaves Are Not Possible 9 4 9 2 Troubleshooting When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible Q TROUBLESHOOTING Are the parameter settings consistent with actual slave configurations Is the QJ71PB92V s Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON Has an error occurred on the DP Slave Diagnostic information detection signal X01 is ON or the corresponding bit in Slave status area Normal communication detection is OFF 0 End Correct the parameters and write them again Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 Check the DP Slave whose bit is OFF 0 in Slave status area Normal communication detection and take corrective actions When the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 is ON check the following ar
175. arm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 3 b10 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b14 Completion status of response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b11 b15 Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request To the next page PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries Table7 35 Response Format When Failed Continued Buffer memory address Result 26449 6751h to The alarm data that was read by the alarm read request without ACK is stored 26484 6774n gt Section 7 5 1 2 a 26485 6775H An error code is stored lt Section 9 4 4 1 When E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 1 is stored 1 35 gt Section 9 4 4 26486 6776n 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 Alaimidata N i 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed err
176. ata size is set Figure 7 4 Example of I O Data Exchange Parameter Settings 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 3 Assignment of devices in program examples The program examples given in Sections 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 6 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description X00 Data exchange start completed signal YOO Data exchange start request signal X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal X11 Operation mode change completed signal Y11 Operation mode change request signal X1B Communication READY signal X1D Module READY signal X1F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 7 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X20 I O data exchange start command SM402 ON for 1 scan only after RUN X21 Communication error detection reset command MO Refresh start request X22 Communication error area clear command M2 For operation mode change interlock X23 Operation mode change command M400 Initial setting execution command X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st w
177. ats in the time control function providing a program example 1 Making a sequence program For details on the program example refer to Section 7 6 4 I O data exchange normal Y19 X19 Time control execution command I O data exchange normal X19 Normally completed Un G26800 Response code Failed lt gt Un G26800 Response code Writes request data Un G26784 to Un G26792 SET Y19 Read the response code and error code Un G26800 Reads the execution result Un G26801 to Un G2681 2 RST Y19 Processing for failed completion RST Y19 Figure 7 18 Sequence Program Time Control Function 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries 7 6 1 Time data read request This section explains the request and response formats of the time data read request in E 3 1 Request format Table7 43 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value 2 26784 68A0H Set a request code Set value 1600H 2 26785 68A14 to Empty area Write 0000H E L 26792 68A8h Set value Fixed to 0000H 58 no Zz O z O m O a N 2 fe E O Zz ra Sge Eda lt Qu gi 2 SEb ow gt ann PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves T 49 7 6 1 Time data read request PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ries 2 Response format a When normally co
178. atus Un G26417 to Un G26424 1 is stored in All stations alarm status Un G26416 0 No alarm in all DP Slaves 1 Alarm detected Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 This area stores the alarm detection status of each DP Slave Initial value 0000n If an alarm is detected in any one of the stations and the corresponding bit turns ON 1 in Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 the RSP ERR LED turns ON 0 No alarm including reserved temporary slave reservation not configured and or non alarm ready stations 1 Alarm generated b10 b9 b6 b4 b3 b2 bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 1019 8 7 6 51 4 3 2 14 Each bit indicates 32 31 the n th DP Slave 30 29 28 26 23 21 20 19 17 48 47 46 45 44 42 39 37 36 35 33 64 63 62 61 58 55 53 52 51 49 80 79 78 77 74 71 69 68 67 65 96 95 94 93 90 87 85 84 83 81 112 1 111 1 110 1 109 125 106 103 101 100 99 122 119 117 116 115 105 121 104 120 114 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 26424 6738n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 23 Each Station s Alarm Status Un G26417 to Un G26424 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area This area stores diagnostic information settings and actual diagnostic information O
179. ave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 4 4H Profile Features Supported is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 5 5H Profile Ident Number is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 6 6H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 S_Type is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 2 S_Len is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 7 7H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 D_Type is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 2 D_Len is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 8 8H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH T 24 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries b When failed Table7 23 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 0H An error code is stored 3 Section 9 4 3 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 T
180. ax A B Aor B whichever is greater Table3 23 Items in the bus cycle time Bc calculation formula Item Description MSI ms Minimum polling cycle Min slave interval Polling time to i th station Treqi Max_Tsdr i Tres e Treq i ms Request transmission time of i th station Number of bytes output to i th station 9 x 11 bit x 10 Transmission speed bps Pt i ms e Max_Tsdr i ms Response time TBit of i th station 2 3 x 105 Transmission speed bps e Tres i ms Response transmission time of i th station Number of bytes input from i th station 9 x 11 bit lt 103 Transmission speed bps Tsditw ms Request response processing time Tsit of DP Master QJ71 PB92V 4x 103 Transmission speed bps Lr ms Data refresh time 5 50 Number of DP Slaves x 100 x 10 1 The value set on the Master Settings screen of GX Configurator DP 2 The MaxTsdr value described in the GSD DDB file of the DP Slave 3 Tsi Bit Time is a unit that expresses the time required for 1 bit data transmission as 1 The actual processing time differs as shown below depending on the transmission speed Transmission speed is 1 5 Mbps 4 Tpit 1 1 5x 10 0 667 x 10 s 0 667 10 ms Transmission speed is 12 Mbps 1 TBit 1 12x 10 0 083x 10 s 0 083x 10 ms 4 The Tsdi value described in the GSD DDB file of the QJ71PB92V The Tsdi value varies as show
181. bal control function esessscescccoco00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 31 A 9 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaveseessesseseeseescesccsccsccccsccsecsees 7 82 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition eeeeseeeeseseeceseeceseececocceccococeococeccoseccecocscoseccosose 7 83 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves eeeeeeeseseeeseeececsoeeocecoosoosececoesoosoeeee 7 83 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation eseeeeseseeseseeseseceececcececeecescecesecceseee 7 B5 CHAPTERS DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 8 1to8 7 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Z 2 8 2 BBLKRD Instruction 00o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 J 4 8 3 BBLKWR Instruction esecccccccccooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 6 CHAPTER9 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 1to9 25 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions eeececesccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcccccvccccces Q 2 9 2 Troubleshooting When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible sseeeeesseeeeessceceecsooooo0009 4 9 3 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System eeseseeeeseeeeeseseeeceoecoocecceocososscccoeosossoceoesoossceeoee9 G 9 3 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switchingee e eeseeeeessseeeeesseeeees009 G 9 3 2 Whe
182. be set per QU71PB92V Select Areas for Update with CPU M Slave Specific Transfer Input v jo Output D gt 5000 Block Transfer Comm Trouble Area 0 g 10000 Extd Comm Trouble Area D 10300 Slave Status rea D x 10500 0 12272 0 12272 0 12038 0 12162 0 12263 Cancel Figure 6 10 Number of Automatic Refresh Parameter Settings When Set by Block Transfer 6 18 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters Up to 5 automatic refresh parameters can be set 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELS eG Q series b When Slave Specific Transfer is used When the automatic refresh of I O data is set by Slave Specific Transfer i e when changing the refresh target device on a per DP Slave basis the following number of automatic refresh parameters can be set per QU71PB92V Max number of settings Number of connected DP Slaves x 2 3 Slave Parameter Settings Model QU71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION AA Slave Properties Name Slave_Nr_001 FDL Address 1 0 125 Watchdog Slave Watchdog time 5 1 65025 min T_sdr fit 1 255 10 ms Group identification number C Gp1 Gp2 Gp3 Gp4 l Gp5 Gpb Gp f Gps IV Active M Syne Output F Freeze Input r ASe Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory Input CPU Device D fo 0 12272 Output CPU Device o gt 5o00 10 12273 F Swap 1 0 Bytes in Mast
183. c refresh or dedicated instructions is not executable App 3 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system POINT The Communication mode mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 and DPV2 functions Because of this the bus cycle time is increased compared with the former models If fast response is required reexamine and replace the existing system since some control timing may be delayed in the system For details on the bus cycle time of the QJU71PB92V refer to Section 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 PROFIBUS cable The PROFIBUS cables used for former models can be used for this model Bus terminator The QJ71PB92V does not have any built in bus terminator When the former model is used with the bus terminator switch set to ON use a connector with a built in bus terminator for the QJU71PB92V Operation mode setting Set the QJ71PB92V s operation mode on GX Configurator DP or in the sequence program Configuration software Use GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later for setting QJ71PB92V parameters Use of PROFIMAP or GX Configurator DP Version 6 or earlier is not allowed Parameters Convert parameters of former models using GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later Parameter conversion can be executed by Change Master Type on GX Configurator
184. cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce AD I O data exchange arca eccccccccccccccccccccccccvccces 3 74 L List of I O signals coooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000 3 4 Local FDL address display area eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 Local station error information area eeeeeeeeeeeceeeee 3 21 Local station information area ceeeeeccceececeeecceeeee 3 21 M Master parameters C000 COOOCO OOOO OO OOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOO 6 6 Max bus cycle time COCCCOOOOCEO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOOCOOOOCE 3 43 Min bus cycle time COOCCOCOOOOOOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOOOEEOOOOE 3 43 Module READY signal X1 DB 3 1 6 0 Offline test status area eecceccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 22 Operation mode change ALE ceccccccccccccccsccccese 3 23 Operation mode change completed signal X11 3 14 Operation mode change request areaseeeseeeeeeees 3 23 Operation mode change request signal Y11 3 14 Operation mode change result area sseeseseeeeeeees 3 23 Operation mode setting oooooooooooooo000000000000000000 5 3 Operation mode signal X10 ececcccccccccccccccccccce 3 13 Output data area for mode 3 eeeeceecceeceeecceveeee 3 26 Output data start address area for mode 3 esses 3 28 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop Error ceececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccoocoee 4 24 P Parameter SEttingeerececcccccccccccccsccscccsccscccccoccs 6 1 Parameter setting status area Active station 3 33 Parameter setting status area Reserved station s 3 33 Perfor
185. ce program R Read only R W Read write executable 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list To the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELS eG el series Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued Address Le Initial Read Reference Name Description n 5 DEC HEX value Write Section 26145 to 26415 Sa System area Use prohibited 662114 to 672Fu 26416 to 26424 Slave status area This area stores the alarm status of each DP 0 R Section 67304 to 6738x Alarm detection Slave 3 4 5 26425 to 26431 System area Use prohibited 67391 to 673FH 26432 to 26434 This area is used to set the request data for Section Alarm request area an 0 R W 6740n to 6742n alarm acquisition 3 4 11 26435 to 26445 aa System area Use prohibited 67431 to 674Dn 26446 to 26768 This area stores the execution result of alarm Section Alarm response area o 0 R 674Ex to 68901 acquisition 3 4 11 26769 to 26783 System area Use prohibited 6891 to 689Fu 26784 to 26792 This area is used to set the request data for Section Time control setting request area 0 R W 68A0H to 68A81 time control 3 4 12 26793 to 26799 System area Use prohibited 68A9x to 68AFn 26800 to 26812 Time control setting response This area stores the execution result of time 0 R Section 68B0u to 68BC1 area control 3 4 12 26813 to 32767 System area Use prohibited 68BDu to 7FFFH
186. cedures and Settings before System Operation 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSECE 1 y Check the LEDs of the QJ71PB92Vs in systems A and B ose Section 5 3 for an error 2 Start I O data exchange 1 Did I O data exchange start successfully Check the LED status lt _ 7 Section 5 3 No Check the parameter settings gt 2 To the previous page Yes Completed 1 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO Start it from GX Configurator DP 2 Check the Local station error information area Un G23071 to see if the QU71PB92V has an error or not 3 Section 3 4 2 If an error exists remove the error cause When an error exists system switching is not executed Figure 5 2 Procedures before System Operation Redundant System Continued 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation 5 4 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ol zZ ore ESO fy wi i ro AGS near SEs Ww gt ann PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC IA ries 5 3 Part Names and Settings This section explains the names and settings of each part of the QU71PB92V
187. ces Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description D2000 to s Extended diagnostic error information read result D2126 D2500 to For word conversion of extended diagnostic error D2502 information data size 1 Varies depending on the data size of the extended diagnostic error information 2 Program example X24 Y6 UO The target FDL address W Hov KI 623456 ig setto1 SET Y6 J Extended diagnostic information read request X6 Y6 UO The read result and data ANN pease BMOV G23457 D2000 K2 J sizes tead U0 mo Hoaz00 jo 673459 aooo ks y Deads tne statis address c y D2001 K2 D2500 J Reads the extended lit D2500 D2501 D2502 J diagnostic error information U0 c So 23462 D2005 D2502 J Extended diagnostic error RST Y6 J information read Processing for completion processing failure of extended gt D2000 HOA200 diagnostic error information read h TRST Y6 J information read completion processing Extended diagnostic error Figure 7 12 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information T7 12 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information PROGRAMMING MELSEGC TE eries 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function 1 Assignment of devices in program examples The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a
188. change FFi is stored 23460 5BA4H On No other extended diagnostic information 00H to 7Dx 0 to 125 FDL address exists 804 Other extended diagnostic information exists o Zz 23461 5BA5ux The ident No of the DP Slave is stored Initial value 00004 z 23462 5BA6n 9 ps to The extended diagnostic information max 244 bytes is stored Initial value 0000n 23583 5C1 FH Figure 3 27 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Response Area Un G23457 to Un G23583 n 6 a Eo a9 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 42 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area This area stores the bus cycle time 1 Current bus cycle time Un G2272 The current bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 2 Min bus cycle time Un G2273 The minimum value of the bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 3 Max bus cycle time Un G2274 The maximum value of the bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 3 43 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 9 Global control area This area is used for the global control function OVERVIEW 1 Global control area Un G2081 a Set the global control function to be executed Specify the global control service to be sent by bits b5 to b2 in the Global control area and set the target group No by bits b15 to b8 Initial val
189. cing the system sseeeeeseesseeeeeseosseecoesoosscecoesoosscecoesoossee ADD 4 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs seeeeeeseeeseeecessoosscocoesoosococoesoosocecoesosssee ADD 5 Appendix 3 External Dimensions eesseesseeeeeeeseesesecossosccoosccoooccossosccososscssossosossccssossossssses ADL 16 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 ABOUT MANUALS The following manuals are related to this product Please purchase them if necessary Related Manuals Manual Number Model Code GX Configurator DP Version 7 Operating Manual SH 080579ENG Explains the overview installation method screen operations etc of GX Configurator DP Version 7 13JU54 Sold separately Manual Name GX Configurator DP Operating Manual CommDTM Explains the overview installation and operating methods etc of MELSOFT PROFIBUS CommDTM Sold separately SH 080582ENG 13JU55 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES When incorporating the Mitsubishi PLC into other machinery or equipment and keeping compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives refer to Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Man ual hardware supplied with your CPU module or base unit The CE logo is printed on the rating plate of the PLC indicating compliance with the directives Note that no additional measures are necessary for this product to make compliance with the directives ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS A
190. commercially available FDT must be connected to the control system The FDT DTM technology cannot be used in the standby system 2 The FDT DTM technology must be utilized for temporary applications If it is used for a constant application 2 when system switching occurs execution of the FDT DTM technology may be disabled even after reconnection to the new control system If this occurs wait for several minutes and then retry the execution 1 Parameter settings of DP Slaves temporary status monitoring etc 2 Constant status monitoring etc 3 The time during which the FDT DTM technology is re executable varies depending on the DP Slave If not re executable retry until it becomes executable 4 16 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 3 FDT DTM technology 4 FUNCTIONS M ELS eG lA orie 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions POINT i 1 To utilize PROFIBUS DPV2 functions use a DP Slave that supports the z PROFIBUS DPV2 For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When using the PROFIBUS DP2 function set a Min slave interval value z greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr lt 5 Section 5 3 5 1 Dg If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and 26 Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV2 function may take time no 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves lt q O This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the tim
191. complete Completed Figure 4 11 Procedure Using Alarm Read Request without ACK and Alarm ACK Request Alarm ACK request 4 14 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE cries b Alarm read request with ACK This request automatically sends ACK after reading an alarm ACK is returned in response to all read out alarms OVERVIEW Alarm generation The alarm is read from the DP Slave Alarm read request with ACK ACK is returned to the alarm for which processing is complete CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Take corrective actions for the error that occurred on the DP Slave Completed Figure 4 12 Procedure Using Alarm Read Request with ACK SPECIFICATIONS 2 Executing alarm acquisition Execute alarm acquisition by the following procedure a In the Slave status area Alarm detection Un G26416 to Un G26424 identify the DP Slave where an alarm is occurring o Z O O Z 5 Le b Write the request data to the DP Slave into the Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 c Turn ON the Alarm read request signal Y 18 d When alarm reading is completed the read result is stored in the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 and the Alarm read response signal X18 turns ON PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION e Check the alarm stored in the Alarm respon
192. ction 4 19 4 FUNCTIONS 4 20 2 Invalidating or validating data swap setting For DP Slaves that handle data whose word structure is the same as that of the QJ71PB92V invalidate the data swap setting QJ71PB92V Data 1 Data 1 H L Input data 4 Data2 Data 2 area H L L Data3 Data 3 H L Output 4 Data Data 4 data area H L L M ELSEG sores DP Slave Input data Input area Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 H L H L Data2 Data2 Data2 Data2 H L H Figure 4 18 When Invalidating the Data Swap Setting Output data Output area Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 H L md H L Data 4 _ Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 H L H gt Y I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte For DP Slaves that handle data whose word structure is the reverse of the QJ71PB92V validate the data swap setting area Output data area Input data J lt QJ71PB92V DP Slave Input data Input area Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 H l w Jg L H L H Data 2 Data 2 as Data 2 Data 2 Data2 Data 2 H i D O H O H T v Output data Output area eaa lana fo Data 3 Data 3 8 Data 3 Data 3 Data3 Data 3 H i L 3 Bl L
193. d AAOH Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed The length of the alarm data is stored Unit byte 26449 6751h Stored value 1 to 64 The alarm type is stored Stored Alarm type Diagnosis alarm Process alarm 26450 6752n Alarm data No 1 Pull alarm Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer specific alarm 26451 6753H The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 To the next page T 32 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Table7 31 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 26452 6754H 10 No error occurred
194. d signal X04 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 when executing the global control b When the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON and global control processing is completed the Global control completed signal X04 turns ON c After the Global control completed signal X04 has turned ON turn OFF the Global control request signal Y04 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM d Turning OFF the Global control request signal Y04 turns OFF the Global control completed signal X04 25 e Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 while the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is ON If the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON with the Data exchange start completed signal X00 OFF both of the Global control completed signal X04 and Global control failed signal X05 turn ON Writing of output data 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo Data exchange start completed signal X00 Output data is written FUNCTIONS Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed signal X04 1 Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 Figure 3 4 Global Control Request Signal Y04 Global Control Completed Signal X04 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 10 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICAT
195. ding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 4 26488 6778H The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 26489 6779h to Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0n 26529 67A1H to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8h 26569 67C9H to 26608 67FOH Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869H to 26688 6840H 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Normally completed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750H is ON 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request T 37 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING b When failed Table7 35 Response Format When Failed MELSEC TE eries Buffer memory address Result 26446
196. dule Output data of 3rd module Output data of 5th module Because of no output data setting for 2nd and 4th modules no area is assigned for them 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 26 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the FDL address and I O data length of each DP Slave are stored in this area Information of 125 modules is stored in the Address information area for mode 3 in the same order for each module Information for reserved or temporary slave reservation is also stored Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 b0 22528 5800x FDL address of 1st module The FDL address of the 1st module is stored Initial value FFFFu 22529 5801n I O data length of 1st module 22528 5800x 0000n to 007Dx 0 to 125 FDL address 22530 5802n FDL address of 2nd module FFFFH No FDL address assigned The input data length of the 1st The output data length of the 1st 22531 5803n 1 O data length of 2nd module module is stored Initial value module is stored Initial value FF 1 FF 1 to 22529 58011 OOH to F4
197. dundant System 9 3 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 7 9 3 2 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA eries 9 3 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system The following shows how to perform maintenance in the standby system during Backup mode operation and to restart the redundant system operation Maintenance Sequence program modification Parameter change in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Change of QU71PB92V operation mode Recovery from error Powering OFF and then ON Reseting redundant CPU Replacement of QU71PB92V Figure 9 6 Detail of Maintenance 7s Start Connect GX Developer to the control system CPU On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer select Separate mode for Operation mode of the redundant CPU 1 Stop the system for which maintenance is to be performed standby system CPU Disconnect the PROFIBUS cable connected to the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Connect GX Developer to the standby system CPU j Set the operation mode of the standby system CPU to Debug mode 1 1 In Debug mode setting in Redundant parameter of GX Developer select Start with Debug mode 2 Write the set redundant parameters to the standby system CPU 3 Reset the standby system CPU or power OFF ON the standby system Perform maintenance of the standby sys
198. e FDL address 90 FDL address 120 FDL address 121 FDL address 125 J J Y yY 6 DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave 5 modules Figure 2 6 When Connecting 124 DP Slaves Non Redundant DP Slaves Only is E n 6 a ES oz a6 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 10 cg 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 11 MELSEC TA eries 2 When using only redundant DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 30 Connection points counted as number of modules DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Standby system EDL address 1 P P nigel Redundant QJ71 si Redundant QU71 module CPU PB92V module CPU PB92V Tracking cable e S Segmenti ed DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave FDL address 31 X J V DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 7 Maximum Configuration with No Repeater Connected Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M al 26 Fel series 3 When using redundant and non redundant DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 Redundant DP Slave 29 Non redundant DP Slave 30 OVERVIEW Repeater 2 2 Connection points co
199. e Class1_SERVICE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00x to 7D 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00H to 7Du 0 to 125 1 1H FUNCTIONS 2 Set CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value 00H to 7Ex 0 to 126 Set the length of the data to write Unit byte Set value 1 to 240 Set the slot No to write Set value 0 to 254 Set the index to write Set value 0 to 255 Set the data to write 2 2H 3 3H PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 4 4H b15 b8 b7 bO 5 5H to 124 7CH PARAMETER SETTING 124 7CH Data 240 Data 239 125 7Dh to Empty area Write 0000n 127 7FH Set value Fixed to 0000H PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 19 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 19 Response Format When Normally Completed MELSEC TE eries Offset Address Result 0 0H A response code is stored 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE Stored value A401H 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE Stored value A411H
200. e the sample program in section 7 2 is replaced 2 XIB XID XIF X20 X0 2 __ 1 F man ToP HO I K960 p K4Y100 KI YO H cyo XO X1B XID XIF i 1 4 M100 1 W100 i E FROM HO IKO K4X100 K Ax RES W100 i B __ H To HO pK960 kioo KI Naa b J Change the buffer memory address in the input area Change the buffer memory address in the output area Figure App 3 Changing Input and Output Areas App 13 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs X1B X1D XIF x20 x0 Baer 1 E h ToP HO l K14336 J K4v100 KI YO i cyo XO XID XIF i 1 4 H100 W100 Ol FROM HO 1K6144 K4x100 KI W100 2S4 To HO 1 K14336 K4Y100 KI X J APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries d Changing a program for input and output data Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 In the following example the sample program in section 7 2 is replaced Processing at input data reception Processing at output data reception cyi00 Y cyiol Y Add the program for reading the each station status from Slave status area Normal communication detection Add the status read from Slave status area Normal communication detection to the interlock oo FROM HO K23040 D2000 K1 yi E A M100 1 D2000 0 1 X10
201. e 2 5 Maximum Configuration with a Repeater Connected Non Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries c When connecting 124 DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 124 Repeater 4 OVERVIEW 2 Connection points counted as number of modules Control system DP Master Class 1 Standby systemi DP Master Class 1 y FDL address 0 y SY FDL address 1 z P i g UE Fowo Redundant QJ71 Ower Redundant Qu71 Supply Cpu PB92V Supply Cpu PB92V GO module module Tracking cable n Segment 1 z Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 O DP Slave DP Slave ERPE DP Slave a FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 30 Repeater 1 DP Slave 29 modules Segment 2 2 2 O 5 DP Slave DP Slave duont DP Slave a FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 Repeater 2 L J p EA z DP Slave 30 modules Z we one eo Segment 3 282 Oo O orn obo ann DP Slave DP Slave eoee DP Slave FDL address 61 FDL address 62 FDL address 89 Repeater 3 1 X V Repeater 3 2 z DP Slave 29 modules i ae Lu m Segment 4 Segment 5 z L DP Slave ETER DP Slave DP Slave EET DP Slav
202. e 5 of QCPU Set the refresh target device for I O data in the Select Areas A for Update with CPU screen Block Transfer et ar Section 6 6 2 7 6 E 2 Set the I O data refresh target device on each 2 DP Slave in the slave parameter settings ou Section 6 5 Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory m a A awo 255 Set the refresh target device for other than I O data in the hy Select Areas for Update with CPU screen lt gt Section 6 6 2 e m Bos OFF ene Write the automatic refresh parameter to the QCPU 1 L Section 6 6 3 BOY End Figure 6 7 Automatic Refresh Parameter Setup Procedure 1 When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system write the same parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B o zZ E lu o oc Lu E W PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 15 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter setup procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Kel ries 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings Select Areas for Update with CPU 1 Start procedure a Setup AutoRefresh Settings 2 Setting items Select Areas for Update with CPU Iv Sue Specie Tastes Input Ren k fi Output Non li Block Transfer F Comm Trouble Area Ma z jE Extd Comm Trouble Area l Slave Status Area Ne el Ic DK Figure 6 8 Auto Refresh Setting Table6 8 Setting Items for Automatic Refresh Settings Select Areas for Update wi
203. e QJ71PB92V b After the QJ71PB92V is restarted the status is the same as the one after e The PLC is turned OFF and back ON again e The QCPU is reset 9 Operation mode signal X10 This signal indicates whether or not the current operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 Table3 6 Operation Mode Signal X10 ON OFF Status Description ON Other than Communication mode mode 3 OFF Communication mode mode 3 3 13 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 10 Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 when changing the operation mode to the one set in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 The operation mode can be changed without resetting the QCPU b lt Turning ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 clears the information of the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 c The Operation mode change completed signal X11 turns ON when the operation mode is changed and the result of the change is stored to the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 8 S5 Make sure that A3004 Normally completed is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 e Turning OFF the Op
204. e a DP Master with such a communication chip configure another network For the communication chip currently used consult its manufacturer PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 4 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA eries 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 1 Maximum configuration with no repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 31 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as number of modules Power 1 QJ71 supply QCPU PB92V module Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave seemed DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 31 Ne J V DP Slave 31 modules Figure 2 1 Maximum Configuration With No Repeater Connected 1 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 2 Maximum configuration with a repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 61 Repeater 1 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as number of modules Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave easied es DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 30 La vV J DP Slave 30 modules Repeater 1 Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave
205. e area Un G2085 becomes 0 after the Data exchange start request signal YOO turns ON 4 34 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA orie 3 Functions available for redundant systems The following shows the functions available for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system Table4 10 Functions available for redundant systems Function PETE SAG Reference PROFIBUS DPVO I O data exchange A 1 Section 4 1 1 A of diagnostic and extended diagnostic A Section 41 2 Global control function A 1 Section 4 1 3 PROFIBUS DPV1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves x Section 4 2 1 Alarm acquisition x Section 4 2 2 Support of FDT DTM technology x Section 4 2 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP Slaves A Section 4 3 1 Data swap function O Section 4 4 Data Data consistency function by automatic refresh O Section 4 5 consistency function Data consistency function by dedicated instructions A 1 Chapter 8 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error oO 2 Section 4 6 Temporary slave reservation function A 1 Section 4 7 O Available A Available with restriction x Not available 1 For precautions for using respective functions in the redundant system refer to section 7 9 to 7 9 7 2 Independently of the setting I O data exchange with DP Slaves is continued until both A and B systems go down 4 Setting for u
206. e buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V DP Master Class 1 A stop error f occurred S i c data exchange L DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave UG D ub The output data before the stop error are held Figure 4 26 When Error time output mode is Set to Hold QJ71 PB92V 4 26 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the DP Slave station type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Since there is no need to change slave parameters changing a DP Slave setting to a reserved station is easy OVERVIEW 1 DP Slaves that can be changed to Temporarily reserved stations Normal DP Slaves can be changed to Temporarily reserved stations Changing Reserved stations DP Slaves set as reserved stations with slave parameters to Normal DP Slave status is not allowed Temporarily Normal DP Slave BEBE E E i m gt Can be changed Temporarily Normal DP Slave Qm naa au u1 Can be changed Normal DP Slave ksal BHGHEEE Reserved station Not changed Figure 4 27 DP Slaves That Can Be Changed to Temporarily Reserved Stations 1 In the slave parameter setting of GX Configurator DP Active is unchecked for this DP Slave L gt Section 6 5 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFIC
207. e is duplicated with Check the parameters that of the DP Master in parameter settings L gt Section 6 3 and 6 5 Initialize the QJ71PB92V initialization of the flash FAULT ON Parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted ROM and write parameters again Section 9 5 An unexpected error other than the above has Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative occurred explaining a detailed description of the problem TOKEN OFF The token is not being rotated 1 Depending on the number of DP Masters within the same network and the transmission speed setting the TOKEN LED seems to be unlit even in execution of token passing lt gt Section 5 3 9 2 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries 2 Checking the LED status on GX Developer The status of the QJ71PB92V s LEDs can be also checked on the H W LED Information screen H W LED information of GX Developer For checking the LED status use GX Developer Version 8 27D or later Start Procedure Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information button gt H W Information button HIW Information p Module Value 0000 Module Name QJ71PBS2 Product information 070910000000000 B Displag format HEX C DEC HAW LED Information HAW SW Information Trem RUN vate C ieu raue ool READY 0o01
208. e module Tracking cable 2 O 3 Segment 1 Z W Bus terminator Bus terminator D DP Slave DP Slave oge DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 31 k A vyv DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 4 Maximum Configuration with No Repeater Connected Non Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 O Zz R PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 8 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE cries b Maximum configuration with a repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 60 Repeater 1 Connection points counted as number of modules eer FDL address i l Coritrol system J Epi adaress 0 Standby system J epi address 1 Power Redundant QU71 Power Redundant QJ71 supply cpu PB92V supply GPU PB92V module module Tracking cable Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave ETET DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 30 J v DP Slave 29 modules Repeater 1 Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave etee tc DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 61 X vV J DP Slave 31 modules Figur
209. e of g each DP Slave DP Master Class 1 Power QJ71 supply QCPU PB92V module Time setting o Z O O Z 5 ire awd a Ae gue 5020 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave aes SEG rate A m m ann Figure 4 14 Time Control Function 1 Requests available on the QJ71PB92V 9 For whether the DP Slave supports this function or not refer to the manual for the DP 5 n Slave m m a Requests for writing time data a Table4 6 Request for Writing Time Data Request Name Description i Sets the year month day hour minute and second and writes the Time data write request time data g Writes time data in UTC seconds Time data write request UTC year month day hour minute second is fe format The set value 9DFF4400n represents January 15 in 1984 x 00 00 00 Yn a ES Sz 0e B2 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 4 17 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LEY eries b Request for reading time data The time data read request is used to read the time data written to a DP Slave by another time master out to the QU71PB92V This request can be used when two or more time masters exist on the same network Time master 1 Power QJ71 P supply CCPU PB92v Time master 2 module Time data read request Time data Time setting
210. eas and take corrective actions on the DP Slave that has sent the diagnostic information Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Diagnostic information area Extended diagnostic information area Figure 9 3 Troubleshooting When Communications with DP Slaves Are Not Possible Continued 9 2 Troubleshooting When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible MELSEC TE eries 9 5 10 Z e e I v wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel series 9 3 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System This section explains the troubleshooting procedures for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system 9 3 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching The following shows the troubleshooting steps for the case where output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Output data turns OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching No Check the intelligent function module switch setting Is the standby master FDL address of the QU71PB92V set correctly 7 Section 6 7 Yes Does the set watchdog timer value No Set a proper watchdog timer value that satisfy the calculation for each DP Slave satisfy the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 formula shown in Section 4 8 5 for each DP Slave Yes Using GX Configurator DP check the parameters
211. eed to create a special sequence program for the swapping QJ71PB92V DP Slave 3 Input data Input area 7 z Data1 Data 1 Data1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 a H L o L H L H o Input data 4 pata 2 Data 2 5 Data2 Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 di H o 3 O W O W f v Output data Output area a a z Data 3 Data 3 8 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 2 H L G L H S ee lt Data4 Data4 a Data4 Data 4 g H D L A I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 16 Data Swap Function o Z O O Z 5 ire 1 Data swap setting The data swap setting can be made with the slave parameters Slave Parameter 9 w 5 Settings in GX Configurator DP at oo Data swap setting must be made for each DP Slave 23S W zZz Mark the Swap I O Bytes in Master checkbox to enable the swap setting for the DP SEE u gt Slave o i Slave Parameter Settings Model QJ71PB93D Revision z Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION aa i Slave Properties th Name Slave_Nr_001 F a FDL Address fis fO 125 F Watchdog min T_sdr 11 1 255 Group identification number N Gpl f Gp2 l Gp3 l Gip4 M Gp5 F Gp6 l Gp F Gps N Active Sync Output F Freeze Input 2 r e Wat 2 i oO C M Swapl 0 Bytes in Master Cancel Default User Param Select Modules Figure 4 17 Data swap Setting GX Configurator DP 3 a Eo Q Bz 4 4 Data Swap Fun
212. ent 400 m 1312 ft network 3 12 Mbps 1 The max transmission distance in the table above is based on the case where 3 repeaters are used The calculation formula for the transmission distance extended using a repeater s is Max transmission distance m network Number of repeaters 1 x Transmission distance m segment o Z O q 9 3 iw a j FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Function List The following table summarizes a list of QJ71PB92V functions Table3 3 Function List MELSEC TE eries f T Reference Function Description i Section PROFIBUS DPVO Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling the I O data exchange of max 8192 bytes f I O data exchange Vien ae f Section 4 1 1 Note that it is limited up to 124 DP Slaves when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system Acquisition of by te i Ean Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slaves i i e during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O Section 4 1 2 extended diagnostic c signals information By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a Global control function Section 4 1 3 group sy
213. er Cancel Default User Param Set automatic refresh parameters for the No of to 5015 DP Slaves connected to the QJ71PB92V x 2 to f5 Select Modules Select Areas for Update with CPU N Slave Specific Transfer Input M Block Transfer Output Comm Trouble Area D x 10000 0 12038 Extd Comm Trouble Area D X fi 0300 0 12162 D Slave Status Area Cancel Figure 6 11 Number of Automatic Refresh Parameter Settings When Set by Slave Specific Transfer Up to 3 automatic refresh parameters can be set 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters Set automatic refresh parameters for the total 6 19 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o zZ w o x ui W z ind PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE cries 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer Set the output status in the event of a CPU stop error and the standby master FDL address 1 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error For the setting method refer to Section 4 6 2 Standby master FDL address setting The standby master FDL address must be set only when the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system a Start procedure 1 Double click PLC parameter in the project window of GX Developer 2 Enter I O data on t
214. er FDL address display area eeeeeeee 3 54 Current bus cycle LITE ececcccccccccccccccccccccccvccces 3 43 Current diagnostic information non notification time Arca coccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccce 3 37 Current operation mode area ssereeeeeseesceseeseeees 3 21 D Data consistency TUNCTIONceececcccccccccccccccccccscce 4 21 Data consistency requesting signal XOC s ssss9993 13 Data consistency start request signal YOC e 3 13 Data exchange start completed signal X00 ss 9 3 6 Data exchange start request signal YOO esseeeeee 3 6 Data swap function eeccceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccece 19 Diagnostic information area eeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeee0 3 36 Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 3 9 Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 3 9 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 eeseeeee9 3 39 Index 1 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 ocoooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000 3 7 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 s se 3 7 Diagnostic information invalid setting area eee 3 38 Diagnostic information non notification time setting ALLA seeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccvcevccscceslle 3 36 E Each station s alarm status eeecececcccccccccccccvceces 3 35 Each station s diagnostic status eeeeseeeeeeseeeee 3 32 Error check using the LEDs and corrective actions 9 2 Error Codes eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces C
215. er for each module that is connected to PROFIBUS DP Si Ident No is described in a GSD file of each module The UTC is based on the UTC which stands for Coordinated Universal Time UTC In order to adjust the time gap with the GMT Greenwich Mean Time the leap second has been added Time master A master station that can send a request for time control QJ71PB92YV etc System A The system to which the system A connector of the tracking cable is connected System B The system to which the system B connector of the tracking cable is connected Control system The system that is controlling the redundant system and performing network communication Standby system The system for backup in the redundant system New control system The system changed from the standby system status to the control system status due to system switching New standby system PACKING LIST The system changed from the control system status to the standby system status due to system switching The following indicates the packing list of the QU71PB92V Model QJ71PB92V Product name OVE TALLA QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module 1 1 OVERVIEW M ELS eG lA eries CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW This manual explains the specifications functions procedures before system operation and troubleshooting for the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module hereinafter referred to as QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V is used for connecting MELSEC Q Series PLCs to PROFIBU
216. eration mode change request signal Y11 turns OFF the Operation mode change completed signal X11 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo Data exchange start request signal YOO Operation mode change request signal Y11 FUNCTIONS Operation mode change completed signal X11 Operation mode change result area Un G2256 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Set an operation mode in Check the result in Operation Operation mode change mode change result area and request area Current operation mode Figure 3 8 Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 POINT 1 Do not turn the power OFF or reset the QCPU during the operation mode registration to the flash ROM by turning ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 Turn the power OFF or reset the QCPU after the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON If the power is turned OFF or the QCPU is reset by mistake register the operation mode to the flash ROM again If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 C gt Section 9 4 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode lt 5 gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System PARAMETER S
217. espective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer StraBe 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 155 68 55 68 Fax 33 155 68 56 85 e mail factoryautomation framee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount
218. ess Setting range 0 to 125 Default 0 To the next page 6 6 6 3 Master Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING Item Head address on PLC MELSEC KE cries Table6 3 Master Parameter Setting Items Continued Description Set the upper two digits of the start I O number of the QJ71PB92V Set this item for using the Create POU command of GX Configurator DP Setting range 00H to the value shown in 1 Default 00H Error action flag Check this checkbox when sending a clear request to all DP Slaves from the DP Master When a communication error occurs even in one DP Slave the clear request is sent to all DP Slaves Not checked The clear request is not sent to all DP Slaves Checked The clear request is sent to all DP Slaves Min slave interval Set the minimum required time from the slave polling cycle to the next one This set value is enabled on all connected DP Slaves Set a value for the DP Slave that needs the longest time Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 10 Ms Default 80 x 100 4s Polling timeout Set the maximum time required for a requester to receive the response in communication between DP Masters Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 1 ms Default 50 x 1 ms Data control time Set the time during which the QJ71PB92V notifies of the DP Slave operation status Set a value of 6 times or more the watchdog timer set value of the DP Slave Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 10 ms
219. example for global control function If a system switching occurs during execution of the global control function the processing cannot be continued This section explains a program example for reexecuting the global control function in the case of system switching 1 Device assignments in program example a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V The devices are the same as those in Section 7 3 1 a b Devices used by the user Table7 74 List of User Devices Device Description Description Device X25 ON for 1 scan only after switching system from SM1518 standby to control Global control execution command MO Refresh start request lt gt Section 7 9 1 2 Tracking devices for reexecuting the function after system switching Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON e Start command device to which global control request data are set Table7 75 Tracking Transfer Devices in the Program Example for the Global Control Function Device Description Device Description Global control execution command 3 Program example If system switching occurs with Global control execution command X25 ON the global control may be reexecuted after the system switching To prevent reexecution perform the following before Global control request signal Y04 turns ON in the new control system smsi
220. f diagnostics execution procedure The following shows how to execute the self diagnostics a When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to the Separate or Debug mode lt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System b Set the operation mode of the QU71PB92V to Self diagnostics mode mode 2 by either of the following methods e Set by Module Configuration in GX Configurator DP e Set 02H in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 and turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c When the operation mode is set to Self diagnostics mode mode 2 the self diagnostics is automatically started During execution of self diagnostics the TEST LED is ON or flashing Upon completion of the self diagnostics the LEDs on the QJ71PB92V change as shown below storing the test result to the Offline test status area Un G2258 e When normally completed The TEST LED turns OFF e When failed The TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON POINT When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system and performing the self diagnostic test during system operation set it to Self diagnostic mode mode 2 according to the procedure shown in Section 9 3 3 5 4 Self diagnostics PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC Tl cence 2 Execution result of self diagnostics a TEST LED OFF When normally completed When the TEST LED turns
221. ffers depending on the transmission speed lt gt 37 1 in this section Max No of repeaters 3 repeaters Max No of stations 32 per segment including repeater s Max No of DP Slaves 2 125 per QU71PB92V lt 3 Section 2 2 I O data Input data Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave size Output data Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave Number of writes to flash ROM Max 100000 times No of occupied I O points 32 I O assignment 32 intelligent points Internal current consumption 0 57A SVDC External dimensions 98 3 86 in H x 27 4 1 08 in W x 90 3 54 in D mm Weight 0 13 kg 1 The transmission speed is controlled within 0 2 Compliant with IEC 61158 2 2 Up to 124 when the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system _3 Section 2 3 3 1 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 1 Transmission distance Table3 2 Transmission Distance i aa Par 7 Max Transmission Distance when z Transmission Speed Transmission Distance 3 Repeater is Used 9 6 kbps 19 2 kbps 1200 m 3937 ft segment 4800 m 15748 ft network 93 75 kbps 187 5 kbps 1000 m 3281 ft segment 4000 m 13123 ft network z 500 kbps 400 m 1312 ft segment 1600 m 5249 ft network a 3 1 5 Mbps 200 m 656 ft segment 800 m 2625 ft network 6 3 Mbps 6 Mbps 100 m 328 ft segm
222. formation is stored in the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 2 2 O lt Q u 3 w a 2 2 Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 The execution result of the extended diagnostic information read request is stored in this area 9 F Zz If the request failed the values in address 23458 to 23583 5BA2H to 5C1FH become z O OH 5 Le Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO The read result is stored Initial value 00001 ow 23457 5BA11 A2001 Normally completed z 9 lt Other than A200 Failed Error code gt Section 9 4 1 wt 500 The data size of the extended diagnostic information in addresses 23459 to 23583 5BA3x to 5C1F is stored T S a 23458 5BA2n Initial value 00001 Q E 00001 to 00F4n Data size of extended diagnostic information unit byte SRR The information of status 1 is stored The latest information of status 2 is stored Initial value 00H Initial value 00x 23459 SBA3H 004 Normal 004 Normal z Other than 00H L gt Section 3 4 6 4 b Other than 001 L3 Section 3 4 6 4 b i The status 3 information Whether or not any The FDL address of the DP Master is stored i extended diagnostic information other than the one Initial value 004 2 sent this time is stored in the DP Slave is stored For the DP Slave that has not started I O data z Initial value 00 ex
223. g of the QJU71PB92V 1 Communication cable wiring Do not install the QJ71PB92V communication cable together with the main circuit power lines and or load carrying wires for other than the PLC or bring them close Doing so may cause the QJ71PB92V to be affected by noise and surge induction 2 Wirings from PLC and I O modules Keep the PROFIBUS cable away from I O module cables as much as possible Input module Output module y QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS cable __ Wiring of output module a Shield jacket 1 Figure 5 8 PLC Wiring 3 Grounding For use of the QJ71PB92V ground the FG and LG terminals of the PLC s power supply module 5 11 5 5 Wiring 5 5 2 Wiring precautions 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries z m This section explains the procedure for setting QJ71PB92V parameters and details of the parameters 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure Zz 2 The following describes the QJ71PB92V parameter setting procedure o E 26 1 Setting procedure Qe 2 Install GX Configurator DP on the personal computer O Start GX Configurator DP and register GSD DDB files of m DP Slaves E ea GX Configurator DP Operating Manual Create new parameters Select the module model and operation mode n 6 Set Master Parameters C Section 6 3 z Zz y Set Bus Parameters TEN Section 6 4 y awd Set Slave Parameters
224. gnal YOC Data consistency requesting signal X0C a The Data consistency start request signal YOC is used to enable the data consistency function for dedicated instructions Table3 5 Data Consistency Start Request Signal YOC ON OFF Status Description Enables read write executed by dedicated instructions Turning ON the Data consistency start request signal on YOC turns ON the Data consistency requesting signal X0C Disables read write executed by dedicated instructions OFF Turning OFF the Data consistency start request signal YOC turns OFF the Data consistency requesting signal X0C and the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions are not executed b Use the Data consistency start request signal YOC and Data consistency requesting signal XOC as interlock signals for dedicated instructions c When using the data consistency function automatic refresh by the GX Configurator DP turn OFF the Data consistency start request signal YOC Data consistency Data consistency start start request request signal YOC Data consistency requesting signal XOC l Data consistency function enabled Figure 3 7 Data Consistency Start Request Signal Y0C Data Consistency Requesting Signal X0C 8 Restart request signal YOD a If the QJ71PB92V has gone down for some reason the FAULT LED ON the module READY signal X1D OFF turning the Restart request signal YOD OFF ON and OFF again restarts th
225. he CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 1 is stored gt 37 Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 3 3H 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0nH Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 4 4H 1 When E482h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored _ Section 9 4 3 2 When a value other than E482h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 25 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the ABORT service Class2_ SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 24 Request Forma
226. he I O assignment screen and click the Switch setting button b Setting items Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format Q25PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QU71PBS2V Cancel Figure 6 12 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Screen Table6 10 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Items a Set the standby master FDL address when the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system If the standby master FDL address setting is failed an error code is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 lt _ gt Section 9 4 6 Switch 1 1 0 R Ns a v Standby master FDL address Setting range O to 7D 0 to 125 Switch 2 Swin 3 Used for system Setting not allowed Switch 4 If any setting exists delete it Switch 5 6 20 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer PROGRAMMING MELSEC Asnes Ww When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability of the program and confirm that it will not cause system control problems The following lists the installation positions of the QJ71PB92V and corresponding program examples shown in this chapter O lt Single CPU system configuration gt lt MELSECNET H remote I O network co
227. he PLC I O data exchange with DP Slaves is stopped 2 When the QJ71PB92V is installed in a redundant system the setting described in this section is not required The QJ71PB92V continues I O data exchange with DP Slaves until systems A and B go down regardless of the setting shown in this section 1 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error On GX Developer set the output status for the case where a CPU stop error occurs Set desired output status in the intelligent function module detailed settings after setting the I O assignments of the QU71PB92V a I O assignment setting 1 Startup procedure Parameters PLC parameter lt lt I O assignment gt gt Qn H Parameter PLE name PLE systemi Puc tile Puc RAS Device Program Bont tile EE a ei et i Switch setting Sivich vata Detailed setting Assigning the 1 0 addtess is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank anil hat cause an eror to occur Base settinal 8 Slot Detauit 12 Slot Defauli eg dl staan en Import Multiple CPL Parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple EPU zettings Default Check End Cancel Figure 4 23 I O Assignment Setting GX Developer 4 24 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error FUNCTIONS MELSEG Kel series b Intelligent function module detailed settings 1
228. he basic PROFIBUS DP configuration for using the QJ71PB92V as a DP Master Class 1 1 System equipment The following table shows the equipment required for the PROFIBUS DP system Z O z gt o Le Z Q E SYSTEM Table2 3 System Equipment DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V a Configuration tool GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later DP Slave QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc S Repeater Required when 32 or more DP Slaves are connected i PROFIBUS cable Bus terminator poe PecHon se 4 2 Network configuration In the PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following conditions must be 2 satisfied 5 a Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used DP Master DP Slaves lt 126 1 Including the QJ71PB92V gt o wm Number of connectable modules per segment DP Master DP Slaves repeaters lt 32 1 Including the QJ71PB92V 2 A repeater is counted for both segments PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION O wa Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJ71PB92V and any DP Slave d Number of connectable DP Slaves per QJ71PB92V Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V PARAMETER SETTING e Multi master system When a communication chip of ASPC2 STEP C mode or equivalent is used the DP Master cannot be connected to the PROFIBUS DP in which the QU71PB92V is included To us
229. he data showing where diagnostic information of each DP Slave is occurring are stored in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON in the Each station s diagnostic status area Un G23057 to Un G23064 OVERVIEW 3 Acquiring diagnostic information The diagnostic information of DP Slaves is stored in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V Read the diagnostic information from the following buffer memory e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z 5 ire PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 5 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA eries 4 Acquiring extended diagnostic information a Checking the station generating extended diagnostic information For whether extended diagnostic information is stored in any of DP Slaves or not check each DP Slave s Status 1 information that is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 In the case of the 1st DP Slave check b11 of buffer memory address 23073 5A21h b Acquiring extended diagnostic information from DP Slaves Perform the following procedure to acquire extended d
230. he diagnostic information area type selection signal Y03 SM402 SET M400 M400 X1B x1D X1F x0 Yo p 1 t t t To HO K2080 H2B9 K1 To HO K2084 K20 K1 RST M400 Figure App 1 Deleting the Diagnostic Information Area Type Selection Signal Y03 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries b Changing an input start address and an output start address Relevant sample program Section 7 3 X1B X1D XIF X20 XO ae m mH FROHP HO 1k2128 D100 Ki y k ap Yo j Hov D100 z0 i VI El c FROKP HO 1 K2188 1 D101 K1 N 2 TROUBLESHOOTING e i tot z1 Y APPENDICES s TOP HO aj K4Y100 Ki cvo J Change the buffer memory address of the input start address Change the buffer memory address of the output start address INDEX X1B X1D XIF X20 X0 Ol m 1ml FROMP HO K22784 D100 KI Nec m Y0 J j mov D100 z0 aN c SFR HO 1k22912 1 D101 KI N g poy 101 ral c FTop Ho z1 K4vi00 KI bL eo y Figure App 2 Changing Input and Output Start Addresses Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 12 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES c Changing the input area and output area Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 and 7 4 MELSEC TA eries In the following exampl
231. he flash ROM If the same error occurs again replace the QJ71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM oo If the same error occurs again please consult your local E304H The flash ROM clear mode processing is incorrect T o Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem The operation mode was changed during Class2 service E306H i ae After execution of ABORT change the operation mode execution of Acyclic communication n Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Unable to change the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V E307H Separate or Debug mode and then change the operation in the current operation mode of the redundant CPU mode of the QU71PB92V E3A0H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure a F ae E3A1H explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 12 9 4 Error Codes 9 4 2 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error codes generated when switching operation mode Q TROUBLESHOOTING communication M aLS AG lA series 9 4 3 Error codes E4004 to E4FFu Error codes generated during acyclic Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error Code Error Description Action E400H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range 4014 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station
232. he following errors occurs The following table lists the meaning of each bit actions to be taken and the station where the diagnostic information is detected Table3 17 Diagnostic Information Item Bit Description Action Detected in 1 When I O data exchange is started Normally operating This occurs every time I O Requesting transmission of parameters from DP data exchange is started bO DP Slave Slave 2 While I O data are exchanged Check the DP Slave status and communication line b1 Diagnostic information read request Check the DP Slave status DP Slave b2 0 Fixed SEWE b3 The DP Slave is monitored by the watchdog timer Normally operating DP Slave atus b4 The DP Slave entered FREEZE mode Normally operating DP Slave b5 The DP Slave entered SYNC mode Normally operating DP Slave b6 0 Reserved 1 When I O data exchange is stopped Normally operating This occurs every time I O Excluded from I O data exchange according to the data exchange is stopped b7 DP Master parameter settings 2 While I O data are exchanged Check if any parameter has been changed from the DP Master Class 2 on the network Check the DP Slave status and communication b8 Unable to exchange I O data with DP Slaves line DP Master Check the parameters 1 When I O data exchange is started Normally operating This occurs every time I O dat h is started b9 The DP Slave is not read
233. hen Data consistency start instruction is not executed request signal YOC is ON Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKWR F111H signal YOC is ON the BBLKWR instruction is executed when Data consistency start instruction is not executed request signal YOC is ON Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKRD F112H signal YOC is ON the BBLKRD and and BBLKVWR instructions are executed when Data BBLKWR instructions are not executed consistency start request signal YOC is ON The data consistency function in automatic refresh Data consistency start request signal YOC and dedicated instructions are not concurrently F113H was turned ON during execution of the data executable In the master parameter setting of GX consistency function in automatic refresh Configurator DP disable the data consistency function lt _ gt Section 6 3 Diaghosiieiniormation Was deneratedona Check Diagnostic information area for diagnostic F120H RSP ERR LED ON a as g information generated in a DP Slave and take i corrective actions 9 4 Error Codes 9 22 To the next page 9 4 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V Q TROUBLESHOOTING M ALS AG lA series Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Continued Error Code LED Status Error Description Action Check the FDL addresses of the
234. hen changing some of the bus parameters make sure of the PROFIBUS DP standard in advance 1 Start procedure a Right click on the graphic of the cable Modify Settings 3 E Or double click the graphic of the cable 28 b Click the Bus Param button in the Master Settings screen 2 Setting items 2 Bus Parameter O Select Baudrate 1 5 Mbps Profibas FDL Parameters Slot Time T_sl 37 16983 0 200000 in T_sdr si min T_s p11 1023 0 007333 mak T_sdr fa 1023 0 100000 2 O Quiet Tine T qui 0 127 aooo 5 Setup Time T_set 1 255 0 000667 Target Rot Time Tt 256 16777215 83333332 3 GAP factor 1 100 Z a Qo mi HSA 2 126 S o S aos M imil Z ad retry limit E 7 ann Figure 6 4 Bus Parameter Screen Table6 4 Bus Parameter Setting Items Item Description Sets the transmission speed of the PROFIBUS DP When the set value is changed on this screen the Baudrate value in the master parameter settings is also changed automatically Setting range 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps Default 1 5 Mbps Set the slot time maximum time for waiting for a response Slot Time T_sl If this set time is exceeded an error will be detected Setting range 37 to 16383 Unit x Tsit Default 300 x TBit Set the minimum response time of responders Setting range 11 to 1023 Unit x Tpit Default 11 x TBit Set the maximum response time of responders Setting range 37 to 1023 Unit x Tsi
235. hen failed Table7 48 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0h An error code is stored Section 9 4 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H T 52 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format PROGRAMMING MELSEGC TE eries 7 6 3 Time data write request This section explains the request and response formats of the time data write request 1 Request format Table7 49 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value 26784 68A0H Set a request code Set value 1602H 26785 68A1H Set the year Set value 1984 to 2036 26786 68A2H Set the month Set value 1 to 12 26787 68A3H Set the day Set value 1 to 31 26788 68A4H Set the hour Set value 0 to 23 26789 68A5H Set the minute Set value 0 to 59 26790 68A6H Set the second Set value 0 to 59 26791 68A7H Set 1 1000 second Set value 0 to 999 26792 68A8H Set the clock status b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5b4 b3b2 bi bO 6 5 o 4 3 o 2 0 1 1 Set the synchronous setting with the time master 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Set the time resolution minimum unit 00 ims 01 10ms 10 100ms 11 1s 3 Set summer or winter time 0 Set winter time 1
236. hen its FAULT LED is ON 10 Z e e I v Lu l a O Start While the redundant system is operating in Backup mode check that the QU71PB92V is running in the following status QJ71PB92V in new control system Normally operating QJ71PB92V in new standby system FAULT LED ON APPENDICES Check the LEDS and the error code of the QU71PB92V in the new standby system and take corrective actions lt gt Section 9 4 Request the QU71PB92V restart Maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the new standby system is not performed Perform maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the new stand by system lt 3 Section 9 3 3 INDEX Yes Yy Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Separate mode in GX Developer 1 A Set the new standby system CPU to RUN j y In the device test of GX Developer turn Restart request signal YOD OFF ON OFF to restart the QU71PB92V in the new standby system Did the FAULT LED of the QU71PB92V in the new standby system turn off Yes Y Set the new standby system CPU to STOP y Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Backup mode in GX Developer 1 y Completed Figure 9 5 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the New Control System is ON 1 For how to change the operation mode of the redundant CPU refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Re
237. i a 1 Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area at 1 Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non notification time setting area Lt 1 Sets conditions for system switching Lot 1 Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st 1 Specifies the 2nd ttemporary JJ slave reservation Lt Turns OFF Y00 to Y1F Writes tracking transferred J data to Output data area 1 Writes the initial output data value X I O data exchange y start processing Reading input data Reads Slave status area J Writing output data 1 79 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information If a system switching occurs acquisition of the extended diagnostic error information is disabled After the system switching only the extended diagnostic error information that is newly generated after the switching can be obtained For a program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic information refer to section 7 2 7 80 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information PROGRAMMING MELSEGC KE cries 7 9 3 Program
238. iagnostic information 1 Write the FDL address of the DP Slave from which extended diagnostic information is read to the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 2 Turn ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 3 When reading of the extended diagnostic information is completed the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 turns ON and the extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 4 Check the read extended diagnostic information and turn OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 POINT The latest extended diagnostic information that occurred during I O data exchange is stored in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V To check the latest extended diagnostic information read it from the following buffer memory area e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 For program examples on acquisition of extended diagnostic information refer to the following e Single CPU system lt gt Section 7 2 e Redundant system K gt Section 7 9 2 4 6 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG cries 4 1 3 Global control function By multicasting broadcasting data the QJ71PB92V ca
239. ibited O X09 Use prohibited oO XOA Use prohibited oO XOB_ Use prohibited Oo Data consistency requesting signal ON Data consistency a XO0C ANABIGA Use prohibited O OFF Data consistency disabled App 5 Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible To the next page Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries TableApp 5 Input Signal Comparisons Continued Compa Replacement TROUBLESHOOTING A1SJ71PB92D bik QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D tibility precautions AJ71PB92D Watchdog timer error signal ON Watchdog timer X0D Use prohibited error occurred A OFF Watchdog timer error not occurred When replacing the A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D refer to 1 shown below o uw Q O Z iu a a lt X0E Use prohibited Oo XOF Use prohibited O Operation mode signal ON Other than none Operation mode signal Communication X10 ON Parameter setting mode mode 1 oO mode mode 3 i OFF Communication OFF Other than Parameter setting mode mode 1 mode mode 3 INDEX Operation mode change completed signal X11 ON Completed O OFF Not completed X12 Use prohibited O X13 Use prohibited oO X14 Use prohibited O X15 Use prohibited O X16 Use prohibited Oo X17 Use
240. ication error has occurred on a DP Slave Only when the master parameter Error action flag is checked CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo Data exchange start request Data exchange start Data exchange start request signal Y00 completed Data exchange start completed signal X00 s N lt l 4 l FUNCTIONS Exchanging I O data I O data exchange stopped I O data exchange stopped Figure 3 1 Data Exchange Start Request Signal Y00 Data Exchange Start Completed Signal X00 c Use these signals as interlock signals when reading writing I O data d Write the initial values of the output data to the buffer memory before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION e Turning OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO clears the information in the following areas The information in the other buffer memory areas is held z e Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to i Un G23047 i e Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to z Un G23064 S z g oO g DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 6 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 2 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 a The Diagno
241. ication mode mode 3 is registered to the flash ROM at the same time as the operation mode change FFFFH The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode The mode registered to the flash ROM is deleted at the same time as the operation mode change POINT If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 lt gt Section 9 4 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 Operation mode change result area Un G2256 This area stores the execution result of the operation mode change request Stored Value A300H Table3 14 Operation Mode Change Result Area Un G2256 Description Normally completed Other than A300H 3 23 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 3 Operation mode change area Failed Error code 5 Section 9 4 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 4 I O data exchange area This area is used for the I O data exchange function POINT 1 Data are assigned to the I O data exchange area in the order of parameters set in GX Configurator DP in the order of FDL addresses The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configu rator DP OVER
242. ices are attempted concurrently UNFREEZE only is enabled The following shows the services and their set values for b5 to b2 1 Setting for execution of the SYNC and UNSYNC services Table3 19 SYNC UNSYNC Settings b5 b4 Set Value SYNC 1 0 UNSYNC 0 1 1 1 When 1 is set to this bit it is handled as an invalid value The operation is the same as when the value is set to 0 2 Setting for execution of the FREEZE and UNFREEZE services Table3 20 FREEZE UNFREEZE Settings b3 b2 p Set Value Service to be Executed ee ee FREEZE 1 0 UNFREEZE 0 1 1 1 When 1 is set to this bit it is handled as an invalid value The operation is the same as when the value is set to 0 c Setting the target group No b15 to b8 Multiple group Nos can be set for the target group No When Os are set to all of b8 to b15 the set global control service is sent to all DP Slaves including DP Slaves for which group No is not set For details on the global control refer to Section 4 1 3 3 45 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 9 Global control area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area The area is used for acyclic communications OVERVIEW 1 Acyclic communication request area Un G23809 to Un G24832 Set the request instruction of acyclic communication in this area Initial value 0000n Up to eight request instructions can be set For the format for request instruct
243. ices in the Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves Device Description Device Description Time control execution command d Program example If system switching occurs with Time control execution command ON the time control function may be reexecuted after the system switching To prevent reexecution perform the following while ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 is ON ON for 1 scan only after switching the system 1 from standby to control SM1518 X27 1 RST X27 Figure 7 39 Program Example for Time Control Function Time Data Write Request 7 84 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves PROGRAMMING M eLS 2G Kel ceries 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation If a system switching occurs during execution of the temporary slave reservation function ai the processing cannot be continued i The following explains a program example for reexecuting temporary slave reservation 2 function after system switching 1 Device assignments in program example 3 The devices assignment are the same as those in Section 7 9 1 i ao E 2 Tracking devices for reexecuting the function in the case of system 28 switching In the program for the temporary slave reservation function data in the following devices are tracking transferred m Start command device for execut
244. ing DP Master 2 executes polling DP Master 1 executes polling l l DP Master 1 bus cycle DP Master 2 bus cycle time Be 1 L Mineo Time TBC TE ANENE Figure 3 40 Bus Cycle Time When Two DP Masters Exist on the Same Network 3 61 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 5 2 Transmission delay time The transmission delay times of the input data and output data vary depending on the data ai consistency setting i The calculation formulas for the transmission delay time are shown in 1 and 2 below 2 Note that the following symbols are used in calculation formulas 1 and 2 Bc Bus cycle time i Scan Scan time 1 When multiple DP Masters exist on the same network replace Bc with TBc ae 1 When the data consistency function is disabled 2 When reading writing I O data by automatic refresh data consistency function disabled the MOV instruction or FROM TO instruction the transmission delay time is as shown below oO a Output data delay time Table3 26 Output Data Delay Time Data consistency function disabled Item Transmission Delay Time Normal value Bcx 1 5 Max value Bcx2 b Input data delay time o Z O q 9 M oa 7 Table3 27 Input Data Delay Time Data consistency function disabled Item Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Max value Scan Bcx 2 FUNCTIONS PROCEDU
245. ion completion processing Figure 7 15 Program Example for Acyclic Communication READ service Class1_SERVICE 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 29 7 4 5 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition The following explains the request and response formats in alarm acquisition providing a program example 1 Making a sequence program For details on the program example refer to Section 7 5 4 I O data exchange Reads alarm status of each station Un G26417 to Un G26424 I O data exchange nor al Y18 X18 Writes request data Un G26432 to Un G26434 Alarm generation SET Y18 I O data exchange normal X18 Read the response code and error code Un G26446 Normally completed Reads the execution result Un G26446 Response code Un G26447 to Un G26768 Failed Reads the detailed error code lt gt Un G26446 Response code Un G26447 to Un G26768 Processing for failed completion Figure 7 16 Sequence Program Alarm Acquisition T 30 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries 7 5 1 Alarm read request with
246. ion 23455 a System area Use prohibited _ _ 5B9Fn S This area is used to set the FDL address of the 23456 Extended diagnostic information j Section station from which the extended diagnostic FFFFH R W 5BAOn read request area o 3 4 7 information is read 23457 to 23583 Extended diagnostic information This area stores the execution result of the 0 R Section 5BA1H to 5C1Fu read response area extended diagnostic information read request 3 4 7 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23584 to 23591 Parameter setting status area Section set to Normal DP Slave by the slave 0 R 5C20n to 5C27x Active station 3 4 5 parameters s This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23592 to 23599 Parameter setting status area Section j set to Reserved station by the slave 0 R 5C28x to 5C2F Reserved station 3 4 5 parameters This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23600 to 23607 Temporary slave reservation Section set to Temporary slave reservation by the 0 R 5C30x to 5C37u status area f 3 4 5 temporary slave reservation function Thi i d to set DP SI t 23608 to 23615 Temporary slave reservation conan cate e Section Temporary slave reservation using the 0 R W 5C38x to 5C3Fu request area 3 4 13 temporary slave reservation function 23616 to 23647 System area Use prohibited _ lt 5C40n to 5C5Fx System switching condition When the QJ7
247. ion area clear request signal Y02 is ON the following information stays cleared No diagnostic extended diagnostic or local station error information is stored e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 d After the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 has turned ON turn OFF the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 e Taking corrective actions for the error and turning OFF the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 turns OFF the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 f After the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92V checks for diagnostic information again If any diagnostic information has been generated the diagnostic information extended diagnostic information and or local station error information is stored in the buffer memory Clear request Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area Clear completed cleared signal X02 Figure 3 3 Diagnostic Information Area Clear Request Signal Y02 Diagnostic Information Area Cleared Signal X02 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 Global control request signal Y04 Global control complete
248. ion mode change completed signal X11 For a program example for changing the operation mode refer to Section 7 1 1 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 3 6 PARAMETER SETTING 3 4 5 MELSEC TA eries Changing the operation mode by GX Configurator DP a Change method Change the operation mode at Module Configuration in GX Configurator DP For details refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual b When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system The monitoring target is the QJ71PB92V which is mounted on the same base as the redundant CPU where GX Configurator DP is connected by RS 232 cable USB cable etc Error codes for the operation mode change failure If the operation mode change is unsuccessfully completed an error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 on the QJ71PB92V For error codes refer to Section 9 4 2 Precautions when changing the operation mode a When the operation mode change is attempted during I O data exchange When the operation mode change is attempted during I O data exchange the QJ71PB92V stops I O data exchange before changing the operation mode The Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns OFF b Status in which the operation mode change is not executable The operation mode change is not allowed while the QJ71PB92V is executing the following processing Change the operation mode after the
249. ion of the temporary slave reservation function lt q S 3 Program example i N Program example for temporary slave reservation refer to section 7 9 1 POINT The program for the temporary slave reservation must be executed before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 Section 7 9 1 2 ra A aye lt Q T aos uzi eGo ann S z WwW n ri m 7 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 85 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEG Fl caries CHAPTER8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS A dedicated instruction is defined as an instruction designed to make programming easy for use of the intelligent function module functionality This chapter describes the dedicated functions available for the QU71PB92V 1 List of dedicated functions The following list shows the dedicated instructions available for the QJ71PB92V Table8 1 List of Dedicated Instructions Dedicated Reference A y Description instruction section Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified module ensuring data BBLKRD Section 8 2 consistency Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified module ensuring data BBLKWR Section 8 3 consistency 2 Usable devices The following devices are available for dedicated instructions Table8 2 Usable Devices Internal device File register Constant pan R
250. ion or addition of DP Slave s in GX Configurator DP the order of the assigned DP Slaves is changed After modifying parameters check the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expeceted to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program K gt Section 6 5 1 Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 This area is used to set DP Slaves to Temporary slave reservation using the temporary slave reservation function Initial value 00001 0 Not specify the DP Slave to Temporary slave reservation 1 Specify the DP Slave to Temporary slave reservation b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 Each bit represents 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
251. ion reset command X22 Description Communication error area clear command 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 75 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS eee eee ei i i ee Cl PROGRAMMING 5 Program examples a When using automatic refresh MELSEC TA eries This section explains a program for the case where the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using automatic refresh 1 Setting automatic refresh parameters The setting is the same as in Section 7 1 1 1 2 I O data exchange program example Automatic refresh Not needed when the initial setting is not changed Program for DP Slave control lt Section 7 1 1 2 a SM402 SET 400 M400 XIB XID XIF x0 Yo uoy ji t h 4 MOV H289 62080 g uoy Mov K20 G2084 uoy Nov KO 623648 g uoy fHoy HI 623649 g uoy mov H2 623608 RST M400 SMI518 XIB XID XIF uoy po py ge 7 Ty 62080 uoy Ww o G2084 uoy mov Ko 623648 p uoy mov HI 623649 N uoy Mov H2 623608 Poy HO Kayo K2 X1B XID XIF x20 x0 uoy t FNOVP KO G14336 K968 Yo cyo x0 XIB XID XIF H r j CHO Program for reading diagnostic information gt Sectio
252. ion uses the following example requests Table7 52 Details of Program Example Item Description Service name Time data write request 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 53 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Time control start response signal b Devices used by the user Table7 54 List of Devices for the User Device X27 Description Time control execution command mo c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Description Refresh start request gt Section 7 1 1 Table7 55 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Device D5000 Description Description SYSTEM OPERATION Time data write request response area 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves T 55 7 6 4 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 3 Program example MO X27 Y19 X19 U0 i 626784 Request code is set 16024 U0 G26785 Year is set 2005 U0 G26786 Month is set July UO G26787 Day is set 1st UO G26788 Hour
253. ions refer to Section 7 4 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Address DEC HEX 23809 5D01h 25 to Request instruction No 1 area Data size 128 words 23936 5D80x 23937 5D81n to 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo Request instruction No 2 area Data size 128 words 24064 5E00x 24065 5E01n to Request instruction No 3 area Data size 128 words 24192 5E80u 24193 5E81n FUNCTIONS to Request instruction No 4 area Data size 128 words 24320 5F00u 24321 5F01H to Request instruction No 5 area Data size 128 words 24448 5F80u 24449 5F81n PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION to Request instruction No 6 area Data size 128 words 24576 6000n 24577 6001n to Request instruction No 7 area Data size 128 words 24704 6080x 24705 6081H PARAMETER SETTING to Request instruction No 8 area Data size 128 words 24832 6100x Figure 3 29 Acyclic Communication Request Area Un G23809 to Un G24832 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 46 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 47 MELSEC TA eries 2 Acyclic communication request execution instruction area Un G23808 Set the execution instruction for acyclic communication in this area When a bit is turned ON 1 the request instruction corresponding to the bit is executed Initial value 0000n 0 Not execute
254. iption 0001H Parameter setting mode 0002H Self diagnostic mode 0003H Communication mode mode 3 0009H Flash ROM clear mode 0101H Parameter setting mode 0103H Communication mode mode 3 1 1 Operation mode currently registered to flash ROM 3 Flash ROM storage mode Un G2259 This area stores the operation mode currently stored to flash ROM Table3 11 Flash ROM Storage Mode Un G2259 Stored Value Description 0101H Parameter setting mode 0103H Communication mode mode 3 FFFFH Not registered No operation mode has been registered to the flash ROM 3 21 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 2 Local station information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 4 Local FDL address display area Un G2257 The FDL address of the local station is stored Table3 12 Local FDL Address Display Area Un G2257 OVERVIEW Stored Value Description 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 FFFFH Parameter not set 1 When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system the following address is stored When it is in the control system Control master FDL address When it is in the standby system Standby master FDL address The FDL address of the local station 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 5 Offline test status area Un G2258 The self diagnostics test details or test result is stored in this area For details on the self diagnostics test refer to Section 5 4 o Z O q 9 3
255. is set 10 o clock U0 i G26789 Minute is set 0 minutes U0 626790 Second is set 0 seconds U0 626791 1 000 second value is set 0 U0 G26792 Clock status is set 0 Y19 Time control is executed Mo X19 UO i Hov 626800 D5000 Reads the response code and error code D5000 HOAGO2 Processing for normal completion Time control completion RST mg processing Processing for failed D5000 HOAGO2 completion Time control completion processing Figure 7 19 Program Example for Time Control Function Time Data Write Request T 56 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 4 Program example PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation Program example for temporary slave reservation refer to section 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 POINT The program for the temporary slave reservation must be executed before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO gt Section 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation T 57 PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJU71PB92V ona MELSECNET H Remote I O Network This section presents a program example for the case where the QJ71PB92V is
256. it x 10 ms Default 0 x 10 ms Bus Param button Displays the Bus Parameter screen gt Section 6 4 1 The upper limit of the Head address on PLC setting range varies depending on the QCPU with which the QJ71PB92V is installed For details refer to the manual for the QCPU 6 3 Master Parameters 6 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 0 zZ im N pe mi w PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TA eries POINT 1 When Error action flag is checked outputs of all DP Slaves are cleared when a communication error occurs even in one DP Slave To restart output perform either of the following operations e Turn OFF the Data exchange start request signal Y00 and then turn it ON e Reset the QCPU 2 When using the PROFIBUS DPV1 or PROFIBUS DPV2 function set a Min slave interval value greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr K gt Section 3 5 1 If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV1 or PROFIBUS DPV2 function may take time 6 3 Master Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 6 4 Bus Parameters Set the PROFIBUS DP parameters Normally the bus parameters are used as default values gt W
257. itching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 23649 5C61H 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Each bit represents 23650 5C62x 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 A 23651 5C63x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23652 5C64x 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23653 5C65n By turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 the DP Slaves specified in the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 become the target for system switching System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Specifies system switching condition Un G23648 to Un G23656 ON OFF Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON OFF Data exchange start completed signal X00 Settings N system switching iaei System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection Un G23664 to Un G23672 Figure 3 36 Operation in System Switching Condition Setting Area Disconnected station detection Stores result data 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries System switching is performed when an error occurs in communication with a DP Sla
258. l settings are not changed Figure 7 25 Program Example for the I O Data Exchange Function When Mounted on a Remote I O Station Continued T 64 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 8 2 Other precautions When programming for the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H remote I O station pay attention to the following OVERVIEW 1 QJ71PB92V I O signals I O signals of the QJ71PB92V are refreshed into link devices LX LY on the remote I O station and then transferred to the remote master station Make the link devices LX LY of the remote master station refreshed into the devices X Y of the QCPU and use them in sequence programs CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 QJ71PB92V buffer memory Use MELSECNET H dedicated instructions REMFR REMTO instructions for reading from or writing to the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required until read write of actual data is completed For details on the REMFR REMTO instructions refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 8 Progra
259. le wiring specifications bus terminator and other information 1 Pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector The following shows the pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector D sub 9 pin female connector on the QJ71PB92V Table5 6 Pin Assignments of the PROFIBUS Interface Connector Pin No Signal Code Name Description Cable color 1 SHIELD 1 Shield protective ground Z 2 Open 3 B B RxD TxD P Receive send data P Red O sO O 4 Open BO O 3 7O 5 C C DGND 2 Data Ground O O 6 yP 2 Voltage _ 7 Open 8 A A RxD TxD N Receive send data N Green Figure 5 5 PROFIBUS Interface g Open c Connector 1 Optional signal 2 Signal used to connect the bus terminator 2 PROFIBUS cable The following shows the PROFIBUS cable and wiring specifications a PROFIBUS cable Use a PROFIBUS cable that meets the following specifications Type A IEC 61158 2 compliant Table5 7 PROFIBUS Cable Item Transmission line Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable Impedance 135 to 165 Q f 3 to 20 MHz Capacity Less than 30 pF m Conductor resistance Less than 110 Q km Cross sectional area 0 34mm or more 22AWG 5 9 5 5 Wiring 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Mi aL 26 LY caries b Wiring specifications QU71PB92V ai x SHIELD PR
260. line is connected Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 2 2H Set a transmission timeout value Unit 10ms The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value 0 to 65535 3 3H Set Alignment The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H 4 4H Set Features Supported The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0001H 5 5H 6 6H 7 7H 222 Set Profile Features Supported The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H Set Profile Ident Number The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set S_Type The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set S_Len The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H To the next page 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Table7 21 Req
261. lot 0 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 140 Assignment fat ee Manemame Ponie Sta a a hor ea X TIROEN 32points EEN ia v 0x41 32points gure 7 3 I O re T in Program Example Table7 2 Assignment of Input and Output Signals QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F YOO to Y1F QX41 X20 to X3F 7 2 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 2 Settings a QU71PB92V settings W Table7 3 QJ71PB92V Settings Item Description FDL address FDL address 0 Transmission speed 1 5 Mbps Operation mode Communication mode mode 3 Input data area for mode 3 6144 18004 to 6239 185FH 5 I O data area for FDL address 1 me Buffer memory Output data area for mode 3 14930 3800H lo 02 utpu y k 14431 385FH as I O data area for FDL address 2 Input data area for mode 3 6240 1860h Buffer memory Output data area for mode 3 14332 3860n b DP Slave Settings 2 fe E Table7 4 DP Slave Settings 1st module S m Item Description g FDL address FDL address 1 zi A Input data size 96 words 192 bytes I O data size P Output data size 96 words 192 bytes Table7 5 DP Slave Settings 2nd module Yn Item Description FDL address FDL address 2 9 Input data size 1 words 2 bytes ra I O data size 7 Output data size 1 words 2 bytes A See Edo pag age uUz
262. lue 0 to 31 awo AF 4 26488 6778H The slot No is stored g ti if Stored value 0 to 254 22 O 26489 6779H to wZ i Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 SEb 26528 67A0H i 0 a 26529 67A1h to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8h 26569 67C9h to Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26608 67F0H i N 26609 67F1H to Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 ti 26648 6818H z 26649 6819H to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26688 6840n 26689 6841H to Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 7 26728 6868n 26729 6869H to Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 26768 6890H 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Normal completion the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750H is ON 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK T 43 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING b When failed Table7 38 Response Format When Failed MELSEC TE eries Buffer memory address Result 26446 674En An error code is stored gt Section 9 4 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm was read is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2 1 1 The re
263. m Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network T 65 7 8 2 Other precautions PROGRAMMING Mi ELSEG Q series 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System This section explains program examples for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system 1 Making a sequence program The following explains the sequence program creation for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system a Handling output signals of the QJ71PB92V 1 How to turn ON an output signal of the QJ71PB92V An output signal of the QJ71PB92V is turned ON with the OUT instruction using the start command device To keep each function enabled or re executable 1 in the case of system switching tracking transfer the start command device data Tracking transfer is not needed for output signals of the QU71PB92V 1 For whether or not each QJ71PB92V function can be continued or reexecuted in system switching refer to Sections 7 9 1 to 7 9 7 Start command Output signal i of QJ71PB92V P_ o J Start command device data Using the start command device it are tracking transferred turns ON with the OUT instruction Figure 7 26 How to Turn ON an Output Signal of the QJ71PB92V 2 Processing after system switching Output signals of the QJ71PB92V are turned OFF in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 This prevents the QJ71PB92V s output signals from
264. m a DP Slave to the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Input data area is completed and the reading is executed upon completion of the data transfer Alternatively the QJ71PB92V stands by for data transfer to DP Slaves until writing from the QCPU to the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Output data area is completed and executes the data transfer upon completion of the writing lt After the data consistency function is used gt QJ71PB92V QCPU DP Slave Buffer memory a i TTT 0 1 8 ae Updated area for data 3 j S 4 transferred from DP gea 7 6 E e a 7 Slave Read after completion Data transfer Not updated area for data of data transfer completed transferred from DP Slave Figure 4 21 Example of Input Data Consistency 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 21 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z 5 Le PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS FUNCTIONS MIELSEC Aeres 2 How to prevent data inconsistency The data consistency function can be used by either of the following methods a Data consistency function by automatic refresh The automatic refresh settings are made with the master parameters Master
265. mance specifications ccooooooooooooooo00000000000 3 Pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface CONNECHOrececececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecccccecece H O PROFIBUS Cable ceccscccccccccccccccccccccccsccccsccees 5 9 PROFIBUS DP network configurationsssessssssssees 2 4 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions eeecceeccccccccccccccccces 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions eeecececccccccccccccccece 411 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions eeeccceccccccccccccccccce 4 17 R READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE eeeeeeeeeeesoececsooececocoesoseeoe 7 16 Redundant system support function eeseeeeeeeeeeeee 4 29 Restart request signal YOD ocoooooooooooo00000000000 3 13 S Self diagnostics ooooooooooo0o00000000000000000000000000000 D_7 Slave parameters eeeecssseececccococosocococccocoooso 6 11 Slave status area ecceccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccccces 3 99 Slave status area Alarm detection ssessessesseeees 3 35 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection COC OOCOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OO OOOO OO OOOOOOOOOCE 3 32 Slave status area Normal communication detection COC OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO LOO OOOO SOO OOOOCOOOOOE 3 30 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Standby master FDL address display areasesesse 3 54 System switching ooocooooooo0000000000000000000000000000 4 3 System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection sererrersessesseseee 3 55 System switching condition setti
266. mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 4 POINT 1 The information in Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 is not cleared even if corrective action is taken for the relevant error that has occurred on a DP Slave To clear the information in Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 2 When b11 of the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 is set to ON 1 information is not stored in the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 3 41 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area This area is used to read the extended diagnostic information from DP Slaves OVERVIEW 1 Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose extended diagnostic information is to be read Initial value FFFFH Table3 18 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Request Area Un G23456 Set Value Description to 007D ee Sct the FDL address of the DP Slave 0 to 125 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO By setting the FDL address is set in the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 and turning ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 the extended diagnostic in
267. mounted and used on a MELSECNETH H remote O station 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station This section explains a program example for the I O data exchange function when the QJ71PB92V is mounted and used on a MELSECNET H remote 1 O station 1 System configuration example Q25HCPU Remote master station QU71LP21 25 a QX42 MELSECNET H remote I O network Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V 2 DP Slave Bus terminator Bus terminator Figure 7 20 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange When Mounted on a Remote I O Station T 58 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 1 Modules are installed in order from slot 0 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 120 Assignment sit Type Modelname Points staixy PO fere fere Q25HCPU ee gt oeo inteni v 0371LP21 25 1 1 0x42 64points_ v 2 2 Figure 7 21 I O Assignment in Program Example Remote Master Station 6 E Table7 56 Assignment of Input and Output Signals Remote Master Station g 20 ne as QJ71LP21 25 X00 t
268. mpleted Table7 44 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0H A response code is stored Stored value A600H The year is stored Stored value 1984 to 2036 The month is stored 26801 68B1H 26802 68B2H Stored value 1 to 12 The day is stored 26803 68B3 w Stored value 1 to 31 The hour is stored Stored value 0 to 23 The minute is stored Stored value 0 to 59 The second is stored Stored value 0 to 59 1 1000 second is stored Stored value 0 to 999 The UTC second year month day hour minute second is stored The stored value 9DFF4400H represents January 1st in 1984 00 00 00 Stored value 9DFF4400H to FFFFFFFFH 26810 68BAn to UTC nanosecond ms to ns setting is stored 26811 68BBu Stored value 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH The clock status is stored b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5b4 b3b2 bi bO 6 5 0 4 3 0 2 0 1 26804 68B4H 26805 68B5H 26806 68B6H 26807 68B7H 26808 68B8h to 26809 68B9H 1 Synchronous setting with the time master is stored 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Time resolution minimum unit setting is stored 00 ims 01 10ms 10 100ms 26812 68BCH 11 1s 3 Summer Winter time setting is stored 0 Winter time setting 1 Summer time setting 4 Advance notice of summer wi
269. n Completion M1001 REMTO instruction Result M1002 REMTO instruction Completion M1003 REMTO instruction Result M1004 REMTO instruction Completion a M1005 REMTO instruction Result M1006 REMER instruction Completion M1007 REMER instruction Result M1008 REMER instruction Completion M1009 REMER instruction Result M1010 REMTO instruction Completion M1011 REMTO instruction Result c Devices used as buffer memory read target Table7 62 List of Devices Used as Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description DO to D95 Input data D6000 Diagnostic information invalid setting area Diagnostic information non notification time setting D100 to D195 Output data D6001 area D200 to D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D208 to D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status D216 to D224 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network Slave status area Diagnostic information detection T 61 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 5 Program example a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlock
270. n 7 1 1 2 b 1 76 END J Turn ON the initial E setting execution command J Initializes Diagnostic info 1 invalid setting area Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area Sets conditions for system I switching Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st Specifies the 2nd temporary E slave reservation Turn OFF the initial setting execution command Initializes Diagnostic info 1 invalid setting area L Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area Lo Sets conditions for system 1 switching Sets a system switching 1 DP Slave 1st J Specifies the 2nd temporary VJ slave reservation Turn OFF Y00 to Y1F Writes the initial output data value O data exchange y start processing ee Figure 7 35 I O Data Exchange Program Example Automatic Refresh 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING b When using dedicated instructions This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using dedicated instructions MELSEC TE eries Not needed when the initial setting is not changed SM402 SET I W400 X1B X1D XIF X0 Yo i F rdn F HOV H2B9 Pry K20 J _______riigy KO I Hov HI py H2 I RST i SHI518 XIB 1D IF i
271. n below depending on the transmission speed Refer to 3 for the unit TBit Table3 24 Request Response Processing Time of DP Master Request Response Processing Time of DP Master 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 93 75kbps 187 5kbps 70Tsit 500kbps 150Tsit 1 5Mbps 200Tsit 3Mbps 250Tsit 6Mbps 450Tsit 12Mbps 800Tsit 3 59 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries b Bus cycle time calculation example The following shows a calculation example of the bus cycle time a Transmission speed 1 5Mbps ed DP Master FDL address 0 S QJ71PB92V No of DP Slave 3 modules Bus terminator PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator I 0 DP Slave FDL address 1 DP Slave FDL address 2 DP Slave FDL address 3 AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D 2 Input 0 points Input 16 points Input 1 word Output 16 points Output 0 points Output 2 words fa 2 nz 58 AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QU71PB93D oO Output data size byte 2 0 4 Input data size byte 0 2 2 Figure 3 39 System Configuration Example 1 MSlI ms value MSI ms 80 x 100 us 8 0 ms 2 Ptj ms value 7 2 O lt Q u 3 w a 2 Table3 25 Pt i Value DP Slave 2 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 108 0 9 x 11 x 109 1 5 x 108 4 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 108 g Treqw ms 0 081 0 066 0 09
272. n simultaneously control I O data ai of each DP Slave in a specified group i e DP Master Class 1 Power 71 supply QCPU pagay 6 module Sent to group 1 g qo E i 58 MG i DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave l DP Slave DP Slave IN 2 Group 1 Group 2 2 lt q Figure 4 5 Global Control Function E W B n o Z O O Z 5 ire PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 7 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE cries 1 Global control services a SYNC UNSYNC 1 SYNC This service starts the SYNC output synchronization mode In the SYNC mode the output status is refreshed every time a DP Slave receives the SYNC service If no SYNC service is received the output status is held 2 UNSYNC This service ends the SYNC output synchronization mode DP Master Class 1 Power Qu71 supply QCPU pgg2y module SYNC service Uis sent to group 1 Bus terminator Group 1 Bus terminator Group 1 DP Slave 1 lt 7 0 Output image memory Data are refreshed at all times by polling lt During UNSYNC execution Default gt The output image memory values are output without being changed Normal status lt During SYNC execution gt The output image memory values are output only once at the timing of the
273. n the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON sssesseseeseeseeeeeee 9 7 9 3 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby systemesecscescescesccscccccccsccsccscssccccsccseosee 8 9 4 Error Codes C0000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 10 9 4 1 Errorcodes E200H to E2FFH Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information 9 11 9 4 2 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error codes generated when switching operation mode eeee 9 12 9 4 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication s e 9 13 9 4 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 9 18 9 4 5 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error codes generated when executing time control sesseee 9 21 9 4 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QU71PB92V eseeseeseesees 9 22 9 5 How to Return the QU71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions seseseseseseseseseseseeeseseeeesosesosesese 9 24 APPENDICES App 1 to App 16 Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QU71PBQ2V eeseeeeseeeeceseccesccoccccecoccccecesocoessoceeeseeoeoe ADL 1 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models eeeeseeseesessessocsosoooooeooeoo00 App 1 Appendix 2 1 Specification COomMparisons e eeeesseessesesceseescocossocoooccossccossoscocosssossoseossssoess ADL 2 Appendix 2 2 Precautions for repla
274. nan as ss I I I I I I I I I I I PROGRAMMING c When using the MOV instruction MELSEC TE eries This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with a DP Slave using the MOV instruction S402 SET M400 M400 X1B X1D X1F x0 Yo U0 _j HOY H2B9 62080 U0 HOY K20 G2084 uo HOY KO 623648 U0 MOY HI 623649 UO MOY H2 623608 RST 4400 SM1518 XIB XID XIF i UO 1 j jH 44 Moy H289 G2080 E UO Mov KO 62084 E UO mov Ko 623648 F UO mov HI 623649 UO mov H2 623608 Fov HO KAYO K2 UO Bmov D100 614336 K9 X1B 1D XIF x20 x0 UO j JE t FMOVP KO G14336 K986 Yo 1 I cyo x0 X1B XID XIF MO uoy n BMOV 66144 DO k96 uoy BOY 623040 D200 K25 UO MO 1k fBNOV D100 614336 K98 Figure 7 37 I O Data Exchange Program Example MOV Instruction 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System Fos Not needed when the initial setting is not changed J 1 Turn ON the initial setting execution command I Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area uo I Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area Let I Sets conditions for system switching Let 1 Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation 1 Turn OFF the initial setting execution command ba
275. nance to be performed on the one in the standby system Perform maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the standby system gt Section 9 3 3 Completed Figure 9 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions This section explains how to check errors by the LEDs or by checking the LED status on GX Developer 1 Causes and actions The following table summarizes causes that can be thought from the LED status of the QJ71PB92V and corrective actions to be taken Table9 1 Causes and Actions E Status Cause Action EADP Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative RUN OFF The watchdog monitoring time has been exceeded i a explaining a detailed description of the problem Read the diagnostic information from the RSP ERR ON A communication error has occurred Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Check the PROFIBUS cable connections Section 5 5 1 e Check if the bus terminator is connected i lt gt Section 5 5 1 e Check if the FDL address of each station is unique lt 3 Section 6 3 and 6 5 e Check if the FDL address does not exceed the HSA lt _ gt Section 6 4 Initialize the QJ71PB92V initialization of the flash PRM SET Flashing Parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted ROM and write parameters again L gt Section 9 5 The FDL address of a DP Slav
276. nchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available PROFIBUS DPV1 a Acyclic communication This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing rere er i 2 with DP Slaves independently of I O data exchange Pe This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have Alarm acquisition Section 4 2 2 been generated on any DP Slave Support of FDT DTM Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the DP Slave parameters and Section 4 2 3 i 2 technology monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of eres i 3 Slaves each DP Slave This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and Data swap function Section 4 4 received When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory this R function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed Data consistency function Section 4 5 e Automatic refresh setting GX Configurator DP e Dedicated instructions BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is Output status setting for the f mounted Section 4 6 case of a CPU stop error When the QJ71PB92V is m
277. nd retry ae Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E446H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO to d ait start I O data exchange Class service of Acyclic communication was executed while E447H i Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in I O data exchange is stopped oe the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions er Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in A physical execution error detected or system switching ese E450H o the Slave status area Normal communication detection occurred during service execution in the redundant system Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions E451H Execution error on the protocol was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E452H Execution error on the application was detected corrective actions E460H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E461H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E462H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E463H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E464H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side R ence ted detected on the DPSI correctly set o
278. ndant CPU where GX Configurator DP is connected by RS 232 5 cable USB cable etc o To display the parameters written to the QJ71PB92V in the standby system qJ perform the following e Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Separate or Debug mode Stop the tracking transfer between the redundant CPUs 2 E O o Z O O Z 5 ire PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 39 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM 2 aS RAT 2 N M ELSEG Q series CHAPTER5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION This chapter explains the procedures for connecting the QJ71PB92V to PROFIBUS DP wiring and other information 5 1 Implementation and Installation This section provides the handling precautions from unpacking to installation of the QJ71PB92V For details on implementation and installation of the QJ71PB92V refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 5 1 1 Handling precautions The following are precautions for handling the QJ71PB92V as a unit 1 Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Do not remove the printed circuit board of each module from its case This may cause a failure in the module 3 Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire burrs enter the module during wiring In the
279. ndling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s loc
280. nfiguration gt z Fare Q Remote master station BO Power 4 Power 1 Supply QCPU Paoay Supply QCPU pat paoey module module 2 O z O m MELSECNET H fs remote I O network D Remote O station Power QJ72LP25 QJ71 supply 25 PB92V g module 6 O Zz ra lt Redundant system configuration gt ous Zee TO 2 Power Power ip i supply Redundant QU71 supply Redundant QJ71 EAR ao module CPU PB92V mod le CPU PB92V R 2 O E n Ww gt ann Tracking cable Figure 7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter o rA m n aa Table7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and E Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter z Installation ay Reference position 7 Section 7 1 to 7 7 zA Z Section 7 8 Z fo oO av Section 7 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY eries 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples This section explains the examples of I O data exchange programs The following system configuration is used as an example for explanations in Sections 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 1 System configuration example Q25HCPU QJ71PB92V DP Master Class 1 i DP Slave DP Slave Bus terminator Bus terminator Figure 7 2 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange 1 Modules are installed in order from s
281. ng result area Disconnected station detection serersessessessesees 3 57 System switching Error eeeccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 4 3 System switching methods ecececcccccccccccccccccccce 4 3 System switching time SOHHSHSSSHSSSOSSHSSS SOSH SSE SOHOOEES 3 64 System switching time in redundant system 3 64 T Temporary slave reservation function sessessesssses 4 27 Temporary slave reservation request area eeeeeee 3 51 Temporary slave reservation status area eesesseee2 3 34 Time control area eecececccccccccccccccccccccccccs 3 50 3 51 Time control over DP Slaves eeeeeeeeeccccccccccccceee 4 17 Time control setting request area eesessesseseeseeees 3 50 Time control setting response area sessesseeeeeeeees 3 50 Time control start request signal Y19 eeseseeeeeees 3 16 Time control start response signal X19 eessesse 3 16 Time data read FEQUESTeeeeeecccccccccccccccccccccocecs 7 49 Time data write request ocoooooooooooo00000000000000000 53 Time data write request UTC format eeseeeeeeeeeee 7 51 Transmission delay IME eecccccccccccccccccccccccccece 3 67 W Watchdog timer error signal X1F ssessesseeseseeees 3 16 Wiring specifications for bus terminator esessessese2 5 10 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE SOCOOSOHSHO SSH SHO SSHOSHHSHOOOHOOHOHOSOOEE 7 1 9 Index 2 TROUBLESHOOTING n Ww Q a Z ii a z WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1
282. nter time switching is stored 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour 5 Time difference the time to be added or subtracted is stored The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Stored value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Time calculation method is stored 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference b When failed Table7 45 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0n An error code is stored Cc Section 9 4 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCH Stored value 0000H 7 50 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 1 Time data read request PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format This section explains the request and response formats of the time data write request ai UTC format i 6 1 Request format Table7 46 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value z 26784 68A0H Set a request code Se ae Set value 1601H bz gt Set the UTC second year month day hour minute second ae 26785 68A1h to The set value 9DFF4400H represents January 1st in 1984 00 00 00 26786 68A2H Set value 9DFF4400H to FFFFFFFFH 26787 68A3h to Set UTC nanosecond ms to ns setting 26788 68A4h Set value 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH z Set the clock status z m
283. ntil e The PLC is turned OFF and back ON again or e The QCPU is reset DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 16 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory This section explains the buffer memories of the QU71PB92V 3 4 1 Buffer memory list M ELSEG seres Address The following shows a list of the buffer memories that are used for transferring data between the QJ71PB92V and the QCPU Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Description ALEL Reference DEC HEX value Section 0 to 2079 si ibi 2 On to 81Fx System area Use prohibited H H F ner eee Values for masking invalidating diagnostic 2080 Diagnostic information invalid information from DP Slaves are set in this 02B9x R W portan 8201 setting area 3 4 6 area 2081 i i i Giobaleontrol area The global control function to be executed is 0 R W Section 8211 set in this area 3 4 9 2082 to 2083 System area Use prohibited 8224 to 8234 E H H 2084 Diagnostic information non This area isused toset the time during Which Section D no diagnostic information is notified after 20 R W 8241 notification time setting area he 3 4 6 communication start 2085 Current diagnostic information The ee Stores me time remaining ume Section onnotiication time area during which no diagnostic information is 0 R 346 62
284. o X1F YOO to Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F 2 The QJ71PB92V is to be installed in slot 0 of the base unit as shown in the figure with the start I O z No set to OOH F f m D 1 0 Assignment a et fase Mel nne Loe tat _ 0 Remote 1 0 Remote 1 0 v QJ 72LP25 25 ms GJ71PBS2V Figure 7 22 I O Assignment in Program Example Gace I O Station 2 Table7 57 Assignment of Input and Output Signals Remote I O Station 2 O ce QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F YOO to Y1F A Sge 10g nw wy W w wuz OFF ene ann o zZ E m n aa W m zA Z 5 g fo oO av Yn a ES Sz ao 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network T 59 cg 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING 2 MELSECNET H remote I O network settings a Remote master station QUJ71LP21 25 settings MELSEC TE eries W Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ether Table7 58 Remote Master Station Settings Item Description Station No Station No 0 Transmission speed 25 Mbps MODE 4 Operation mode Online b Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 settings Table7 59 Remote I O Station Settings Item Description Station No Station No 1 Transmission speed 25 Mbps MODE 4 Operation mode Online c Parameter settings on GX Developer remote master station Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments A
285. o privod ru AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES TEXEL Electronics Ltd Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel_me netvision net il ISRAEL ats MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
286. ocosososocososesosososesescooooscocosososososesesosososeseoeseseoeososososooe _ 7 CONTENTS seseceseseceecosososocosososooososeseococoooeecosososocosososocosososooosooeseseocoosescosososococosesososososesese _ 7 ABOUT MANUALS seessosseecocesososoocsoseocsoococococosococososososososooeocoosoococssocscososososososososososososeseosoo 11 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES e esesesesesesesecesesecesesosescoosococcccooos A 11 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS sesesesesesescosososococosooesoooooseoeocosooococosososooo 12 GLOSSARY ceccccoccoooooo0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 3 PACKING LIS Teecoccccococoooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 14 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 5 1 1 Features coooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 14 2 1 Applicable System 0ooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations e eeeeeeeeeeeceseeccecccccoeccecoocoooo02 3 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration cooocoooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 2 2 1 2 2 2 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP ne
287. odifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GLOSSARY Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 4 3 1 to 3 5 CHAPTER 4 Section 4 1 1 4 1 3 4 2 1 to 4 2 3 4 5 4 6 5 3 5 4 6 1 to 6 3 6 5 6 6 4 CHAPTER 7 to Section 7 1 3 9 4 Appendix 2 Additions 2 3 3 5 3 4 7 4 8 5 2 2 6 7 7 7 7 9 8 1 9 3 9 4 1 to 9 4 6 Appendix 1 Section number changes Section 5 2 5 2 1 Section 7 7 gt 7 8 Section 8 1 to 8 2 Section 8 2 to Section 8 3 Appendix 1 to Appendix 2 Appendix 2 to Appendix 3 Japanese Manual Version SH 080571 B This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi programmable logic controller MELSEC Q series Please read this manual carefully before use to develop familiarity with the functions and performance and use it correctly CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS cscccccoocoooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 A 1 REVISIONS seseeesesesosesooososeocooocococososococosososooososeseocosooseocososososososesesosoooseocosococscosososssosososesee A G INTRODUCTION esesesesesoseseoosoooseoeococococ
288. oduct e The serial No displayed on Product inf list of GX Developer indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added OVERVIEW N Z O z 5 o Le Z Q E SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No 2 14 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the performance and transmission specifications of the QU71PB92V For details of the general specifications refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the QJ71PB92V are given below Table3 1 Performance Specifications Item Specifications PROFIBUS DP station type DP Master Class 1 Transmission specifications Electrical standard EIA RS485 compliant Data link method characteristics Medium Shielded twisted pair cable lt 3 Section 5 5 1 Network topology Bus topology Tree topology when repeaters are used e Between DP Master and DP Master Token passing method e Between DP Master and DP Slave Polling method Encoding method NRZ Transmission speed 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps 3 gt 1 in this section Transmission distance Di
289. ol start Use prohibited oO request OFF Y1A Use prohibited O Y1B Use prohibited O Y1C Use prohibited oO Y1D Use prohibited O Y1E Use prohibited O Wale Use prohibited O App 9 Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES 2 Buffer memory Changes have been made to buffer memory addresses Change programs referring to the following table TableApp 7 Buffer Memory Comparisons QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D Buffer Buffer memory memory address Area name address Area name B x0 1p es 4 Gl 4 6144 to 10239 0 to 959 Input data area for mode 3 Input area 1800 to Ou to 3BFu 27FFu 14336 to 18431 960 to 1919 Output data area for mode 3 3C0x to Output area 3800 to 77Fu 47FFu 22528 to 22777 Address information area for 1920 to 2039 Address information area 5800 to mode 3 780 to 7F71 58F9u 23072 to 23321 Diagnostic information area 2040 to 2079 P Communication trouble area 5A204to for mode 3 7F8u to 81Fx 5B191 23328 to 23454 Extended diagnostic 2096 to 2110 Expansion communication 5B20 to information area for mode 3 8301 to 83Ex trouble area 5B9E 23056 to 23064 Slave status area Diagnostic 2112 to 2116 Slave status area 5A10x
290. om the 0 2 DP Master does not match that of the DP Slave m b11 Extended diagnostic information exists 0 b12 The function requested by the DP Master is not supported 0 gt b13 Illegal response from DP Slave 0 Z ae b14 Illegal parameter s sent from the DP Master 0 map m b15 Controlled by another DP Master 0 ae s Even if diagnostic information corresponding to each bit is generated on a DP Slave it is not recognized as diagnostic information and the status of the QJ71PB92V is as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e No error code and detailed data is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G2307 to Un G23321 and or Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 POINT Set values into the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 38 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address DEC HEX 23072 5A20h 23073 5A21H 23074 5A22n 23075 5A23x to 23320 5B18h
291. om the next buffer address b15 b8 b7 bO Address DEC HEX 14336 3800H Output data of 1st module to Output data length 23 bytes 14348 380CH 14349 380DH Output data of 2nd module N to Output data length N 14352 3810H A Bytes to Output data of n th module 18431 47FFH 14336 3800H 14337 3801H 14347 380BH 14348 380CH 2nd byte of 1st module 4th byte of 1st module 1st byte of 1st module 3rd byte of 1st module 22nd byte of 1st module 21st byte of 1st module 00H 23rd byte of 1st module 14349 380DH 14350 380EH 14351 380FH 14352 381 0H 2nd byte of 2nd module 1st byte of 2nd module 4th byte of 2nd module 3rd byte of 2nd module 6th byte of 2nd module 5th byte of 2nd module 00H 7th byte of 2nd module Figure 3 10 Example of Output Data Assignment 1st module 23 bytes 2nd module 7 bytes POINT If a DP Slave with no output data is assigned its space in the output data area is taken over by the next station with output data as shown below 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module 5th module Each DP Slave setting Output data Set Output data None Output data Set Output data Set Data length 0 Output data Set 14336 3800n 5 Assignment result in Output data area of QJ71PB92V Output data of 1st mo
292. ompletion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO L_a gt 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750n 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Description Bit Description Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 12 data No 5 b8 0 Failed or not executed b 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b9 data No 2 b13 data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completi
293. on D Zz Set data Description Setting range Data type E QJ71PB92V module start I O number 5 Un 3 po f 0 to FEH m Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation BIN 16 bits n1 Start address for writing data Specified device range Start No of the device storing write data Specified device range Device name A n2 Number of write data 1 to 4096 word BIN 16 bits 255 wy W w HO aos Function SF 7 This instruction allows data writing to the buffer memory of a specified module with data eR consistency ensured o z Error An operation error occurs in the following instances Error code 4101 y e When a value outside the setting range is set to the set data field e When the size which is obtained by adding the number of write data to the start lt address for writing data exceeds the buffer memory size e When the points available for the start address for writing data or after is less than the number of write data 0 Z oO O a oO oe o Z O O ir E 2 zZ 1b 1B 07y B 8 3 BBLKWR Instruction 8 6 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC TE eries At the timing of M 10 10 data of 960 points in DO to D959 are written to the Output data area for mode 3 of the QU71PB92V module start I O No 0 with data consistency ensured starting from address 14336 3800n M10 X0C o h esekwr uo K14336 Do K960 Figure 8 6 BBLKWR Instruction Progr
294. on Set value Buffer memory address 26432 6740H 26433 6741H Set a request code Set value 1501H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave to which ACK is to be returned Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 26434 6742h Set the alarm data No for which ACK is to be returned b15 to b8 b7 to bO 00 Fixed See below Bit Description b0_ Execution instruction to alarm data No t b1 _ Execution instruction to alarm data No 2 b2 _ Execution instruction to alarm data No 3 b3_ Execution instruction to alarm data No 4 b4 _ Execution instruction to alarm data No 5 bS_ Execution instruction to alarm data No 6 b6 Execution instruction to alarm data No 7 b7 Execution instruction to alarm data No 8 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request T 35 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 2 Response format a When normally completed MELSEC TA eries Table7 34 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674En Stored value A501H The FDL address of the DP Slave that returned ACK is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read c
295. on status of response to alarm data No 3 14 data No 7 b10 0 Failed or not executed b 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm 11 data No 4 1 data No 8 b 0 Failed or not executed b15 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request T 36 To the next page PROGRAMMING Buffer memory address Table7 34 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Result eG Q series 26449 6751H to The alarm data that was read by the alarm read request without ACK is stored 26484 6774H L gt Section 7 5 1 2 a r 4 26485 6775H A response code is stored Stored value A501H The alarm type is stored a Alarm type Diagnosis alarm type Process alarm 26486 6776n Pull alarm A513 Plug alarm A514 Status alarm A515 Update alarm Manufacturer A5161 specific alarm Alarm data No 1 The alarm status and sequence No are stored A b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 bi bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 26487 6777H 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the correspon
296. on the QJ71PB92V In acyclic communications there are two types of services Class1 and Class2 services The services available on the QJ71PB92V differ depending on whether or not the target DP Slave is performing I O data exchange PARAMETER SETTING Table4 3 Available Services Available Service Target DP Slave Class1 service Class2 service DP Slave performing I O data exchange O O DP Slave not performing I O data exchange x oO PROGRAMMING O Available x Not available Whether the DP Slave supports each service or not can be checked in the GSD file For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 11 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS 4 12 a b MELSEC TE eries Class1 services When executing a Class1 service verify in advance that the bit corresponding to the target DP Slave is ON in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 Table4 4 Available Services Class1 services Service Name Description READ Class1_SERVICE Reads data from any specified DP Slave 1 WRITE Class1_SERVICE Writes data to any specified DP Slave 1 1 The data that can be read or written by READ or WRITE services vary depending on the DP Slave to be used For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave Class2 services Connect the line to the DP Slave by the INITIATE service and e
297. onditions for making a system switching request system switching methods refer to 2 in this section n 6 a Eo a9 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 29 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY eries 4 30 a Operation of the QJ71PB92V in system switching 1 The control system CPU or QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a system switching error For errors that cause system switching system switching methods refer to 2 in this section 2 When system switching occurs the FDL address of the QU71PB92V is changed as shown below Table4 7 FDL Address of the QJ71PB92V in System Switching Item FDL address QJ71PB92V switched from control Control master FDL address gt Standby master FDL address system to new standby system QJ71PB92V switched from standby system to new control system Standby master FDL address gt Control master FDL address These changes can be confirmed in the Local FDL address display area Un G2257 3 System switching is performed and the QJ71PB92V in the new control system continues communication b Redundant system parameters In a redundant system including redundant CPUs write the same parameters to system A control system and B standby system System B Standby system System A Control system oooo a oooo Somme
298. onditions must be met a Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used b c a Control system QJ71PB92V Standby system QJ71PB92V DP Slaves lt 126 1 2 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves are connectable 2 A redundant DP Slave may have two FDL addresses for control and standby systems If all of the DP Slaves are this type the number of connectable DP Slaves is 62 Number of connectable modules per segment Control system QJ71PB92V Standby system QJ71PB92V DP Slaves Repeaters 1 lt 32 1 A repeater are counted for both segments Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJ71PB92V and any DP Slave Number of connectable DP Slaves per QJ71PB92V Up to 124 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 fel series 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 1 When using only non redundant DP Slaves OVERVIEW a Maximum Configuration With No Repeater Connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 2 DP Slave 30 Connection points counted as number of modules 2 lt a DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 sa Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 Ba ao Redundant QJ71 o Redundant QJ71 PPY cpu PB92V PPY CPU PB92V modul
299. onfigurator DP are written to Parameter setting mode QJ71PB92V in this mode S mode 1 When no operation mode has been written to the flash O O z ROM the QJ71PB92V starts up in this mode a Self diagnostic mode mode The unit test on the QJ71PB92V is performed in this mode 2 gt gt Section 5 4 O O Communication mode I O data exchange with DP Slaves is performed in this mode 3 mode Q O This mode is used to return the QJ71PB92V to the factory D Flash ROM clear mode O Z default status gt Section 9 5 S O re O Can be changed X Cannot be changed R 2 Operation mode change using the Operation mode change request area 9 wd ZO Un G2255 ae Perform the following procedure when changing the operation mode from the ass Operation mode change request area Un G2255 SE ann a Write a value for a desired operation mode into the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 b Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c The Operation mode change completed signal X11 turns ON when the operation mode is changed and the result of the change is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 1 zZ im o a im w 3 d Make sure that A3004 Normally completed is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 e Turning OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 turns OFF the Operat
300. ontrol and standby systems Perform maintenance of the other system control system and place the QU71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems in the same operation mode Yes On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer select Backup mode for Operation mode of the redundant CPU 2 Completed Figure 9 7 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the Standby System Continued 1 For how to change the operation mode of the redundant CPU and how to switch the systems refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 When changing the mode from Separate to Backup use the same communication pathway as the one used when Backup mode was changed to Separate mode lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System POINT The following maintenance must be performed on both QJ71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems e Sequence program modification e Parameter modification in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer e Operation mode change of the QU71PB92V 9 3 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 9 9 3 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system 10 Z e e I v wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING 9 4 Error Codes This section explains the error codes that are output on the QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V error codes are classified by groups with error No The following table lists the groups of the error codes and the a
301. or code 2 is stored 1 3 gt Section 9 4 4 26487 6777H 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 3 is stored lt gt Section 9 4 4 26488 6778n 2 When a value other than E508d is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 1 puree 10 Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0h eee ite Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8h 26569 67C9H to 26608 67FOH Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26688 6840H Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869H to 26649 6819H to 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Failed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750n is OFF 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 39 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING D
302. or replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries b Output signals Some output signals have been changed Change programs referring to the following table TableApp 6 Output Signal Comparisons Signal name Compa Replacement AJ71PB92D mere z QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V tibility precautions A1SJ71PB92D Data exchange start request signal YOO ON I O data exchange start O OFF I O data exchange stop Diagnostic information detection reset request signal 9 Communication trouble detection signal reset ON Diagnostic ae Y01 ON Communication trouble detection signal reset O _ information OFF detection signal reset OFF Diagnostic information area clear request signal ON Diagnostic and Communication trouble area clear request signal Yo02 extended ON Communication and extended communication diagnostic trouble area clear request Q _ information area OFF clear request OFF Not used in QU71PB92V Delete the corresponding section in the sequence program Communication trouble area type selection signal Y03 Use prohibited ON Fixed type A OFF Ring type Global control request signal Y04 ON Global control execution request O OFF Yo05 Use prohibited O Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 OR Extonogd Use prohibited O diagnostic information read request OFF Y07 Use prohibited oO
303. ord X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word _ c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 8 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description DO to D95 Input data D1000 Diagnostic information read target D100 to D195 Output data D1100 Read target of operation mode change result D200 to D207 D208 to D215 Slave status area Normal communication detection Slave status area Reserved station setting status D216 to D224 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh This section explains a program for the case where the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using automatic refresh Program examples in this section are based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 1 Setting automatic refresh parameters Enable the automatic refresh parameters and the data consistency function The figure below shows the case that automatic refresh parameters are set by Block Transfer lt Master parameters gt Master Settings Module QJ71PBS2 Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
304. ores data of the DP Slaves that are set to Reserved station by the slave parameters Initial value 0000H The set data are stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON 0 Normal DP Slave or not configured station 1 Reserved station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7l6 5l4 3 2 14 Each bit represents 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 oes 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 4 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 1151114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23599 5C2Fu are fixed to 0 Figure 3 21 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Un G23592 to Un G23599 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 6 Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to temporary slave reservation by the temporary slave reservation function Initial value O000H The setting is stored when the Dat
305. ory Read Target Device D4000 to D4321 Description Device Description P M200 to Alarm read request with ACK response area M215 Slave status area Alarm detection T 46 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 4 Program example PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 3 Program example MO UO Reads the alarm 1 mov G26417 K4M200 status of each station MO M200 Y18 UO h ft 626432 Request code is set 1502H UO The FDL address of the 426433 target DP Slave is set FDL address 1 U0 G26434 Empty area 0 Y18 Executes alarm read MO X18 UO j Hov 626446 D4000 Reads the response code and error code UO D4000 HOAS02 BHOY G26447 D4001 K322 Reads the execution result RST v18 Alarm read completion processing UO R il rror D4000 HOA502 626447 D4001 K322 caos detailed erro code Processing for failed completion Alarm read completion processing Figure 7 17 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition Alarm Read with ACK 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 47 7 5 4 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 48 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves This section explains the request and response form
306. ounted to a redundant system I O data exchange with DP Slaves is continued regardless of the setting until systems A and B go down Temporary slave Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the Section 4 7 i reservation function DP Slave station type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Redundant system support When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and ee er i i function standby systems are switched each other to continue communications 3 2 Function List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU This section explains the input output signals of the QU71PB92V OVERVIEW 3 3 1 List of I O signals The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the QJ71PB92V is 0000 installed to slot 0 of the main base unit Device X represents input signals from the QJ71PB92V to the QCPU Device Y represents output signals from the QCPU to the QJ71PB92V The following shows the I O signals to from the QCPU CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 Table3 4 List of I O Signals Signal Direction QJ71PB92V QCPU Signal Direction QCPU QJ71PB92V 12 X00 Data exchange start completed signal YOO Data exchange start request signal S Le oe Diagnostic information detection rese
307. our QJU71PB92V supports respective functions TableApp 1 Function Upgrade of the QJ71PB92V Function version B or earlier D or later Newly added function Temporary slave reservation O Redundant system support function x O O Available x Not available For how to check the function version refer to Section 2 4 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models This section compares the specifications of the QJ71PB92V and those of the former models and explains the precautions to be taken when replacing the system and programs The former models are shown in the following table TableApp 2 List of Former Models Model Remarks QJ71PB92D _ Products of hardware version B and software version F or later are compared here For versions earlier than the above refer to the following manual to check A1SJ71PB92D i differences PROFIBUS DP Interface Module Type AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D User s Manual IB 66773 Products of software version B or later are compared in this manual For versions earlier than the above refer to the following manual to check AJ71PB92D differences PROFIBUS DP Interface Module Type AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D User s Manual IB 66773 App f Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QJ71PB92V APPENDICES MELSEC TE cries Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons The following compares the performance specifications and functions between the QJ71PB9
308. out ACK This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm read request without ai ACK a fo 1 Request format Table7 30 Request Format fe Buffer memory address Description Set value 7 26432 6740H Set a request code Se ae Set value 1500H i z gt Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm is to be read BIS 26433 6741H Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Empty area Write 0000n 26434 6742h Set value Fixed to 0000H 2 O z f m O n N 2 O E O re m A Sge KO 2 9 oi w2a OFF am ann 1 zZ E m n aa W D PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 31 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aeres 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 31 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674En Stored value A500H The FDL address of the DP Slave from which alarm was read is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 See below Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 bO 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally complete
309. p T Gps 2 WV Active Syne Output f Freeze Input DP 1 support enabled Pw lave Paral awd Grease ESEE 255 n tr one FY sog Q0s ete M Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master oe Cancel Default User Param Select Modules 6 g Figure 6 5 Slave Parameter Settings Screen n Table6 6 Slave Parameter Setting Items th lu Ree Set the name of the DP Slave Setting range max 17 alphanumeric characters FDL Address Set the FDL address Setting range 0 to 125 Check this checkbox to use a watchdog timer g When this setting is enabled a communication error is detected if no data are received from the QJ71PB92V within the time specified in Slave Watchdog time is When disabled a communication error is not detected even if data are no longer received from the Q Watchdog QJ71PB92V Once the Watchdog checkbox has been checked in the master parameter setting Watchdog in the slave parameters cannot be set Not checked Watchdog timer disabled Default Checked Watchdog timer enabled 2 a To the next page 5 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 11 6 12 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries Table6 6 Slave Parameter Setting Items Continued Item Description Slave Watchdog time Set the time of the watchdog timer This setting is available when Watchdog is checked The set value must satisfy the following condition e Bus cycle time lt Set value of Slave Watchdog time lt Set value of Da
310. quest not supported error was detected on the DP correctly set or not and retry Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E4A6H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E4A7H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E4A8H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E4A9H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side To the next page 9 4 Error Codes 9 15 9 4 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication 10 Z e e I o wW l a 5 O E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA eries Error codes E4AAH to E4DEH Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action Access to an access disabled area was attempted from E4AAH the DP Slave side E4ABH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E4ACH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave E4ADH side E4AEH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E4AFH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the E4B0u DP Slave side E4B1H Resource error was detected during read processing on Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is the DP Slave side correctly set or not and retry EABOH Resource error
311. r not and retry E465H S Ae PREE RE ANAS ERRE E RNG For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave side E466H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E467H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E468H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side 9 14 9 4 Error Codes To the next page 9 4 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA ries Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E469H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Access to an access disabled area was attempted from E46AH i the DP Slave side E46BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E46CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave E46DH side E46EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E46FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the E470H DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is Resource error was detected during read processing on E471H the DP SI id correctly set or not and retry aee For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E4724 Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E
312. rak w Poslannikov Per 9 Str 1 Nemocnicni 12 Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 RU 107005 Moscow CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 Phone 7 095 542 4323 Phone 420 59 6152 111 e mail krakow mpl pl Fax 7 095 956 7526 Fax 420 59 6152 562 Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA e mail info estl ru e mail consys autocont cz Str Biharia No 67 77 Elektrostyle RUSSIA louis poulsen DENMARK RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No industri amp automation Phone 40 0 21 201 1146 312 Geminivej 32 Fax 40 0 21 201 1148 RU 630049 Novosibirsk DK 2670 Greve e mail sirius siriustrading ro Phone 7 3832 106618 Phone 45 0 70 10 15 35 INEA SRd o 0 SERBIA AND MONTENEGRO Fax 7 3832 106626 Fax 45 0 43 95 9591 Karadjordjeva 12 260 e mail info estl ru e mail Ipia pmail com SCG 113000 Smederevo ICOS RUSSIA UTU Elektrotehnika AS ESTONIA Phone 381 0 26 617 163 Industrial Computer Systems Zao P rnu mnt 160i Fax 381 0 26 617 163 Ryazanskij Prospekt 8A Off 100 EE 11317 Tallinn e mail inea_sr verat net RU 109428 Moscow Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 AutoCont Controlsro SLOVAKIA Ea 7095 232 0327 e mail utu utu ee SK 02601 Doln Kub n e mail mail icos ru Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Phone 421 435868 210 NPP Uralelektra RUSSIA Ansatie 6a Fax 421 435868 210 Sverdlova 11A FIN 01740 Vantaa e mail info autocontcontrol sk RU 6200
313. ransfer of the redundant CPU is Separate mode O O stopped when parameters are written Debug mode x O T O Writable X Not writable 1 Parameters are written to the redundant CPU to which GX Configurator DP is connected by a RS 232 cable USB cable etc b Target for parameter writing When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system write the same parameters to systems A and B c When some parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s The buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expeceted to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program gt Section 6 5 6 2 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 6 2 Operation Mode Setting This section describes QJ71PB92V operation modes and the procedure for setting the gt operation mode z The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V can be changed by using the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 or on the GX Configurator DP 1 Types of operation modes The following lists the operation modes of the QJ71PB92V 2 o wit Table6 2 List of Operation Modes gt 6 Operation mode change Operation mode Description Operation Mode i Change Request GX Configurator DP Area Un G2255 A The parameters set on GX C
314. rea is used for the time control 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo 1 Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 Set request data for the time control setting in this area Initial value O000n For the request format refer to Section 7 6 2 Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 The execution result of the time control setting is stored in this area Initial value 0000n For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 6 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 11 Alarm area 3 50 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 51 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area MELSEC TE eries Address DEC HEX 23608 5C38H 23609 5C39H 23610 5C3AnH 23611 5C3Bx 23612 5C3Cu 23613 5C3Dx 23614 5C3Ex 23615 5C3FxH Z gt gt Z lt This area is used for the temporary slave reservation function EJPOINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Temporary slave reservation area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP Order of assignment Slave List Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 When parameters have been modified delet
315. reas where they are stored Table9 3 Error Code Classifications MELSEC TE eries DER Storage Location Reference Error Codes Classification Buffer memory address Section Extended diagnostic information read response Error codes generated when reading extended E200H to E2FFH f area Section 9 4 1 diagnostic error information Address 23457 5BA1h Error codes generated during operation mode Operation mode change result area E300H to E3FFH oo Section 9 4 2 switching Address 2256 8D0H Error codes generated during acyclic Acyclic communication response area E400H to E4FFH oe Section 9 4 3 communication Address 25121 to 26144 6221H to 6620n Alarm response area E500H to ESFFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Section 9 4 4 Address 26446 to 26768 674EH to 6890n Error codes generated during execution of time Time control setting response area E600H to E6FFH Section 9 4 5 control Address 26800 68B0n i ici i ion Local station error information area F100H to F1FFH Diagnostic information of local station l l l Section 9 4 6 QJ71PB92V Address 23071 5A1FH 1 The diagnostic information of the local station can be confirmed on the Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer For the confirmation on the Module s Detailed Information screen use GX Developer Version 8 27D or later Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name 1 0 Address
316. remaining ON in the new control system after system switching ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control sal X1B X1D XIF 1 fFMOY HO K4YO K2 Turns OFF the QJ71PB92V s output signal This is the case where output signals of QJ71PB92V are YOO to Y1F Figure 7 27 Processing After System Switching T 66 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Kel series b When keeping the I O data exchange function enabled after system switching 1 Initial setting H iti H H H H H Ww The initial setting is performed in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after z S switching system from standby to control SM1518 3 Initial setting for QU71PB92V startup so T Ty oo ee tWH _ HT MO E z WD XIB XID xir x0 ie THoy HOBO AN kanes Diagnostic info I Hf t J invalid setting area fa Q UO ial ini 2g ruoV K20 e2084 Initializes Diagnostic info non ol notification time setting area UO i Hov Ko ee conditions for system switching 7 UO Sets a system switchin HOY HI 623649 raii 2 O UO ifi B HOY tip 23608 Specifies the 2nd temporary E slave reservation z W R moo B sW518 xie xw iF Ug m ee I j j ji 44 rHoy H289 e2080 J 1 Initializes Diagnostic info pals setting area I HOV KO ma 1 I Initializes Diagnostic info non
317. rns ON and the processing for returning the QJ71PB92V to its factory set conditions is started k When the processing is completed the following status will be identified e When normally completed The TEST LED turns OFF e When failed The TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON When the processing has failed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem POINT If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 CF Section 9 4 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 9 24 9 5 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions Q TROUBLESHOOTING M ELS 26 Fel series 3 Reapply power to or reset the QCPU The PRM SET LED on the QJ71PB92V turns ON and the QJ71PB92V starts in the Parameter setting mode mode 1 Write the QJ71PB92V parameters on GX Configurator DP 10 Z e e I v wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX 9 5 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions 9 25 APPENDICES MELSEC Aries APPENDICES Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V has been upgraded to a newer version with new functions added Refer to this section and check if y
318. ruction interlock Change the buffer memory addresses of the input area and output area wino YOG b LS 2z 2 t i xoc 2 _ i HH H TG BBLKRD uo 1 K6144 1 D200 KI Sa 7 So Hi M100 BMOV K4Y100 D300 KI 1 re 2 xo i 2 _ ZA H Hss 8 BBL KYR uo 114336 D300 KI 1 ae Nae Figure App 6 Replacing Dedicated Instruction QJ71PB92D only Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC KE eries Appendix 3 External Dimensions g 5 T f nn z 5 K QU71PB92V 9 Is eee RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN READY PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT N aay iS G Zz PROFIBUS I F g n Qa lt L 98 3 86 INDEX QJ71PB92V aa C q t a 90 3 54 4 0 16 27 4 1 08 aea Unit mm inch Figure App 7 External Dimensions Appendix 3 External Dimensions App 16 INDEX A ABORT service Class2_SERVICE sssesseeseeseeee 7 26 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information cecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 4A Acyclic communication ArEa eeecececcccccccccccccscces 3 46 Acyclic communication request area eeeeseeeeeeeeee 3 46 Acyclic communication request execution instruction AEA coeeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccvcccs 3 47 Acyclic communication request result areareeeeee 3
319. s 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 21 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 37 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 53 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 74 72 71 69 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 88 87 85 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 104 103 101 98 97 4 1 T rd 124 120 119 117 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b12 of address 23672 5C78x are fixed to 0 the n th DP Slave Figure 3 37 System Switching DP Slave Specification Result Un G23665 to Un G23672 POINT In either of the following cases check the System switching condition setting Un G23648 again e A value other than 0 and 1 is stored in the System switching condition setting result area Un G23664 e Although setting is made in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 data in the System switching DP Slave specification result area Un G23665 to Un G23672 are all Os 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area MELSEC TE cries 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 Processing Time MalAdaAO This section explains the bus cycle time and transmission delay time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time NOLLVYENSISNOO so 1 When a single DP Master is used Time PSG Se R
320. s 1 4 ms 250 ms 93 75kbps 0 18 ms 1 0 ms 60 ms 187 5kbps 0 09 ms 1 0 ms 50 ms 500kbps 0 035 ms 1 0 ms 40 ms 1 5Mbps 0 01 ms 1 0 ms 35 ms 3Mbps 0 007 ms 0 9 ms 35 ms 6Mbps 0 0025 ms 0 8 ms 35 ms 12Mbps 0 002 ms 0 8 ms 30 ms 3 65 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries b Redundant system switching time calculation example Shown below is a calculation example for the system switching time in the redundant system The calculation is based on the following conditions e Scan time is 5 ms e AND is set in System switching condition Un G23648 e In System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 1st to 3rd DP Slaves are set as switching targets OVERVIEW Transmission speed 1 5Mbps DP Master FDL address 0 DP Master FDL address 1 No of DP Slave 3 modules QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V Bus terminator PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator Q 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 DP Slave FDL address 2 DP Slave FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 4 AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D 2 Input 0 points Input 16 points Input 1 word s Output 16 points Output 0 points Output 2 words 2 wn AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QU71PB93D Output data size byte 2 0 4 Input data size byte 0 2 2 Figure 3 42 System Configuration Example FUNCTIONS 1 TcpuA
321. s as follows The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e The corresponding bit in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON d After the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns OFF take actions for the error cause and turn OFF the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 3 7 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA cries e After the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92V checks for diagnostic information again If any diagnostic information has been generated the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON and processing at a is performed OVERVIEW Diagnostic information Diagnostic information detection detection reset reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information Error detection detection signal X01 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Reads diagnostic extended diagnostic or local station error MOV FROM information from buffer memory fens 1 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Local station error information area Un G23071 oO Figure 3 2 Diagnostic Information Detection Reset Reque
322. s depending on the link status of the remote master station host station and remote I O station other station The following example shows a communication program interlock using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 b SW74 b0 SW78 bO of the remote I O station station No 1 H KO 70 SB47 Host baton pass status H KO T1 SB49 Host data link status H KO 12 SW70 Other station baton i Ko pass status T3 SW74 Other station data link status H KO SW78 Other station parameter communication status SB20 Network module status END Figure 7 24 MELSECNET H Remote I O Network Interlock Program Example Set an appropriate value for the timer constant KO according to the following Table7 63 Set Value for Timer Constant Item Set Value Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status T1 T3 T4 Sequence scan time x 4 or more Sequence scan time x 3 or more 1 To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise etc Note that 4 and 3 represent standard values POINT For details of the interlock program for the MELSECNET H remote master station and remote I O station refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network T 62 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB
323. s xp TE EE EE EE TE SE 7 Reexecution is prevented i RST X25 1 when system switching i cies EREA J occurred ee ae a Program for global control gt 37 Section 7 3 Figure 7 38 Program Example for Global Control Function 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 81 7 9 3 Program example for global control function OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves If a system switching occurs the function of the acyclic communication with DP Slaves cannot be continued In redundant systems do not use the acyclic communication with DP Slaves To use the function pay attention to the descriptions given below and fully examine the possible operations in advance 1 Application types and precautions The Acyclic communication with DP Slaves must be utilized for temporary applications If it is used for a constant application 2 system switching causes the new control system to operate in the manner shown in a and b Therefore fully examine the system for any problem 1 Parameter settings of DP Slaves temporary status monitoring etc 2 Constant status monitoring etc a When using Class 1 service When system switching occurs during
324. se Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 OH An error code is stored _3 Section 9 4 3 z 5 Zz b15 b8 b7 bO a 2 1 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Ne Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 Z 3 ot ee 2 The CommRef No is stored g De Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 aos a Empty area Loo eS NEA Stored value 0000H o Z E m N aa Lu m PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 27 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le eries 7 4 5 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 27 Details of Program Example Item Description Request instruction No Request instruction No 1 Service name READ service Class1_SERVICE DP Slave FDL address FDL address 2 Data length 16 bytes Slot No 0 Index 1 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the user Table7 28 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X26 Acyclic communication execution command MO Refresh start request Section 7 1 1 b Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 29 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target
325. se area Un G26446 to Un G26768 o and turn OFF the Alarm read request signal Y18 a a POINT In redundant systems do not use the Alarm acquisition 3 Section 7 9 5 5 For program examples on the alarm acquisition refer to the following Z e Single CPU system gt gt Section 7 5 Z oO e Redundant system lt gt Section 7 9 5 g DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 15 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA eries 4 2 3 FDT DTM technology Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the DP Slave parameters and monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QU71PB92V For details of the FDT DTM technology refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual CommDTM Personal computer i PROFIBUS DP Ethernet J DO Power QJ71 QJ71 DP Slave status monitoring and supply QCPU E71 100 PB92v parameter setting are available via module the QJ71PB92V DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave supporting FDT DTM EJPOINT Figure 4 13 FDT DTM Technology Once system switching has occurred the function of the FDT DTM technology is disabled and cannot be continued When using the function of the FDT DTM technology in the redundant system pay attention to the following and fully examine possible operations in advance 1 A
326. signal X00 turns ON the value in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 becomes 0 While communication is stopped Data exchange start request signal YOO OFF the remaining time is held until the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned ON again 3 37 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA orie Figure 3 24 Diagnostic Information Invalid Setting Area Un G2080 3 Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 Setting some values to this area can mask invalidate any data of the diagnostic information that is sent from a DP Slave during communication Initial value O2B91 g 3 0 Validates the diagnostic information 1 Invalidates the diagnostic information Address 6 DEC HEX b15 to bO lt 2080 820x See below a 3 bit Description Initial value b0 Parameter transmission request from the DP Slave 1 3 b1 Diagnostic information read request 0 b2 Fixed to 0 0 z b3 The DP Slave is monitored by the watchdog timer 1 lt b4 DP Slave entered FREEZE mode 1 5 b5 DP Slave entered SYNC mode 1 D b6 0 Reserved 0 b7 Excluded from I O data exchange according to the parameter 1 settings b8 Unable to exchange I O data with DP Slaves 0 b9 The DP Slave is not ready to exchange I O data 1 Z b10 The parameter No of I O bytes received fr
327. sing the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system To use the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system make the following settings Table4 11 Setting for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system Item Description Reference In GX Configurator DP set the parameters of the QJ71PB92V Parameter setting in GX f The FDL address set as a master parameter is assigned to the Section 6 1 to 6 6 Required Configurator DP ae Re QJ71PB92V in the control system settin 5 Standby master FDL address In the intelligent function module switch setting in GX Developer Section 6 7 i setting set an FDL address for the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Specify the target DP Slaves for system switching in the System i switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Setting of the target DP Slaves Un G23648 to Un G23656 Section 3 4 14 for system switching Set if needed This setting is not required when no system switching is to be performed n the event of a communication error with a DP Slave Set the tracking devices to continuously use the QJ71PB92V Tracking settings Be Section 7 9 to 7 9 7 functions after system switching 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 35 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z 5 Le PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY eries
328. ssignment method I Points Start Monitoring time 200 X 10ms Network type MNET H Remote master aa Module 1 Stat End Total slave fr stations Starting 120 No Parameter name Switch screens Wi Network parameters Assignment the MNET 10 H remote station network range Module No 1 xr setting Network No Total stations Group No StationNo M station gt R station x rd af Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Start End Points Stat End Station No Mode 32 1000 1mF 32m oo00 OOF 32 1000 101F 32 0000 O0iF gt Online aji Network rahge assignment Refresh parameters thterrupt settings T 60 Transfer SB Transfer Sw Transfer Assignment method C Paoints Start E Network parameters MNET 10H refresh parameters Module No 1 Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Start End Link side Dev name Points Stat End PLC side Dev name Points Stat SB 512 0o00 DIFF gt SW 512 0000 O1FF gt Random cyclic LB 1000 101 Transfer2 F 1000 101F Figure 7 23 Network Parameter Setting 3 PROFIBUS DP settings The parameter settings on QJ71PB92V DP Slaves and GX Configurator DP are the same as those explained in Section 7 1 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H
329. st Signal Y01 Diagnostic Information Detection Signal X01 Turning ON the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 does not clear the information shown below To clear the following information turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 7 2 O lt Q u w a Oo FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 8 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 a Turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 when clearing the following information e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 b When the Diagnostic information area clear request signal YO2 is turned ON and the processing at a is completed the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 turns ON c When new diagnostics information is generated while the Diagnostic informat
330. status and start completion status of the DP Slave and then retry For the start completion status of the DP Slave refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When Acyclic communications have been 1 The DP Slave is not able to respond continuously executed to the same DP Slave check 2 Because of current processing of a Class2 service oh the execution intervals and retry the DP Slave cannot handle the next service ar For the execution intervals of the Acyclic 3 The INITIATE service has not been executed RR E4DFH ae communication refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 A transmission timeout has occurred after execution of 3 Retry after execution of the INITIATE service the INITIATE service nes coe 4 Increase the set transmission timeout value of the 5 A system switching occurred during service execution i INITIATE service in the redundant system a 5 After leaving it for a while retry the execution from the INITIATE service in the new control system Depending on the DP Slave the time allowed for re execution varies Continue retrying until it is normally executed E4E0uH No response was received from the DP Slave Check the DP Slave status and retry Any of the following functions are being executed from the Verify that the processing of the following functions is same DP Master to the same DP Slave completed and retry E4E1H e Acyclic communication e Acyclic communication e Alarm
331. status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750n 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Description Bit Description Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 Completion status of response to alarm data No 5 b8 0 Failed or not executed b12 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b9 data No 2 b13 data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b10 data No 3 b14 data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 b11 0 Failed or not executed b15 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed
332. status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b11 b15 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK T 44 To the next page PROGRAMMING Buffer memory address 26449 6751H 26450 6752H 26451 6753H 26452 6754H to 26484 6774H 26485 6775H 26486 6776H 26487 6777H 26488 6778H MELSEC KE eries Table7 38 Response Format When Failed Continued Alarm data No 1 Result 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 1 is stored gt Section 9 4 4 2 When a value other than E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 2 is stored 7 gt Section 9 4 4 2 When a value other than E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 3 is stored gt Section 9 4 4 2 When a value other than E506n is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 67
333. stic information detection signal X01 turns ON when a communication error is detected after the time preset in Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 has elapsed The following processing is performed at the same time that the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON e The RSP ERR LED turns ON e The diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 The extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 The corresponding bit in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON e The error information of the QJ71PB92V is stored in the Local station error information area Un G230771 b Turning ON the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 turns OFF the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 The following processing is performed at the same time that the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns OFF e The RSP ERR LED turns OFF The corresponding bit in the slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON c When new diagnostics information is generated while the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 is ON the behavior i
334. struction Set the value to 1 Un G23808 leti o Compieton status Read the response code and error code Un G25121 E I O data O m neng Normally completed z Un G25121R 4 Reads the execution result D un eSponise coce Un G25122 to Un G25248 Writes the execution instruction Set the value to 0 Un G23808 no Failed 6 Reads the detailed error code lt gt Un G25121Response code Un G25122 to Un G25248 z U Processing for failed completion ows ff Wi ui Writes the execution instruction z A f Set the value to 0 Un G23808 age Figure 7 14 Sequence Program Acyclic Communication TED PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 15 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 15 Request Format This section explains the request and response formats of the READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE Offset Address Description Set Value 0 0H Set a request code 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE Set value 1400H 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE Set value 1410H 1 1H 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00x to 7Du 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set the FDL
335. switching ae request 25 System switching request System switching request 2 Z O lt iS u w a Oo New standby system New standby system New control system New control system Figure 3 41 System Switching Time in Redundant System When QJ71PB92V Requests System Switching to Redundant CPU FUNCTIONS a Redundant system switching time calculation formula The system switching time in the redundant system can be obtained from either of the following calculation formulas e When the systems are not switched due to a slave error or when the system switching condition Un G23648 is set to OR the system switching time Tscu is PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Tscu ms TcpuA Tsw Tp Scan x 2 1 e When the system switching condition Un G23648 is set to AND the system 7 switching time Tsca is E Tsca ms Tscu Nand x 20 To the next page S z g oO g 2 2E z5 Or ao az 3 5 Processing Time 3 64 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries Table3 30 Items in Tics and Tlsc Calculation Formulas a The time taken until the redundant CPU in system A receives a system switching request from the QJ71PB92V in system A and then sends a system switching request to the other redundant CPU in TcpuA ms system B TcpuA ms Scan time 3 System switching time of redundant CPU
336. t Offset Address Description Set Value 0 0H Set a request code Set value 1413H 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave to be connected to network is stored Set value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 Set the CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set Instance Reason The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set Subnet The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 30H 3 3H to 127 7FH Empty area Write 0000H Set value Fixed to 0000H T 26 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Response format z a When normally completed lu gt Table7 25 Response Format When Normally Completed Offset Address Result 0 0H A response code is stored Stored value A413H O E b15 b8 b7 bO Be 2 1 38 ae 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored o Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 E lt Empty area 2 e STE Stored value 0000H G a n b When failed Table7 26 Respon
337. t Default 150 x TBit Set the repeater switching time the time required for switching the transmission direction of the repeater Set 0 when the network does not contain a repeater Setting range 0 to 127 Unit x Tit Default 0 x TBit 1 zZ im o pe mi w 3 Select Baudrate min T_sdr PROGRAMMING max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui To the next page DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 4 Bus Parameters 6 9 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Kel aries Table6 4 Bus Parameter Setting Items Continued Item Description Set the setup time Setting range 1 to 255 Unit x Teit Default 1 x TBit Set the target token rotation time Setting range 256 to 16777215 Unit x Tpit Default 50000 x TBit Set a constant for controlling the GAP update time T_gud Setup Time T_set Target Rot Time T_tr GAP factor Par Setting range 1 to 100 Default Depends on the transmission speed HSA Set the highest FDL address of DP Slaves that exist on the network Setting range 2 to 126 Default 126 ae Set the maximum number of retries for individual data transmission Max retry limit Setting range 1 to 7 Default Depends on the transmission speed Tsi Bit Time is a unit that expresses the time required for 1 bit data transmission as 1 The actual processing time differs as shown below depending on the transmission speed In the case of 1 5 Mbps 1 Tsi 1
338. t 1 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 1 0 Assignment Slot Type Modelname Points Start Fo jere PLE Q25PRHCPU evi 4 O 0 PLC Q25PRHCPU Opoint Pa ie inteli QUI PBS2V Figure 7 32 I O Assignment in Program Example Table7 64 Assignment of Input and Output Signals QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F QX41 X20 to X3F ae 7 70 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Settings z a QJ71PB92V settings W gt Table7 65 QJ71PB92V Settings es Control master FDL address FDL address 0 gt FDL address g Standby master FDL address FDL address 1 g 20 ae Transmission speed 1 5Mbps o z nO Operation mode Communication mode mode 3 lO data area for FDLaddress 2 Input data area for mode 3 6144 180014 to 6239 185FH no eM otiaeely Output data area for mode 3 14336 3800H to 14431 385FH Z E q o IOdinercati FOLA Input data area for mode 3 6240 18601 z W Sete 8 Output data area for mode 3 14332 3860H 5 1 Set the control master FDL address in the master parameter setting of GX Configurator DP 2 c in this section Set the standby master FDL address in the Intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer gt 2 d in this section o CZ O b DP Slave
339. t request O X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 fa signal o X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X03 Use prohibited Yo03 Use prohibited X04 Global control completed signal Y04 Global control request signal X05 Global control failed signal Yo05 Use prohibited X06 Extended diagnostic information read response Y06 Extended diagnostic information read request 2 signal signal E X07 Yo07 5 X08 Y08 X09 Use prohibited Yo09 Use prohibited X0A YOA 2 awd X0B YOB Ze 5 X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal id b m XOD YOD Restart request signal a 9 2 lt i X0E Use prohibited YOE SE z XOF YOF Use prohibited SLR X10 Operation mode signal Y10 X11 Operation mode change completed signal Will Operation mode change request signal 6 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 a aa X14 _ Y14 S Use prohibited Use prohibited W X15 Y15 z X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Alarm read response signal Y18 Alarm read request signal X19 Time control start response signal Y19 Time control start request signal To the next page g g fo fe a RS Yn a ES Sz 0e f Be 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 3 4 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries Table3 4 List of I O Signals Continued Signal Direction QJ71PB92V QCPU Signal Direction QCPU QJ71PB92V 3 5 X1A Use prohibited Y1A X
340. ta control time 6 e When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set an appropriate value so that the formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied Setting range 1 to 65025 Unit x 10 ms or x 1 ms Default 5 x 10 ms min T_sdr Set the minimum response time required for a DP Slave to send a response frame to the QU71PB92V Normally use the default value Setting range 1 to 255 Unit x Teit Default 11 x Teit Group identification Set the group No Grp 1 to Grp 8 of the DP Slave Multiple groups Nos can also be set number Not checked Not belonging to the group No Checked Belonging to the group No Uncheck the box when the DP Slave is to be set as a reserved station Active Not checked Set as a reserved station Checked Set as a station performing I O data exchange Sync Output Freeze Input Check the box to check if the DP Slave supports the Sync function or not in communication for initialization When the DP Slave does not support the Sync function diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 of the QU71PB92V Not checked No function check Checked Function check performed Check the box to check if the DP Slave supports the Freeze function or not in communication for initialization When the DP Slave does not support the Freeze function the diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode
341. tart address of T 14 the request instruction No area to be used Table7 14 List of Start Addresses in Request Instruction No Areas Request Instruction No Request instruction No 1 Start Address of Acyclic Communication Request Area 23809 5D01H Start Address of Acyclic Communication Response Area 25121 6221H Request instruction No 2 23937 5D81H 25249 62A1H Request instruction No 3 24065 5E01H 25377 6321H Request instruction No 4 24193 5E81H 25505 63A1H Request instruction No 5 24321 5FO1H 25633 6421H Request instruction No 6 Request instruction No 7 24449 5F81H 24578 6001H 25761 64A1H 25889 6521H Request instruction No 8 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 24705 6081H 26017 65A1H PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 1 Making a sequence program The following example program is created for executing request instruction No 1 For details on the program example refer to Section 7 4 5 gt VO data 2 exchange norma Reads the execution reaut and completion status Un G 25120 I O data DP Slave exchange exchange Acceptance S normal normal status Completion status Writes the request instruction a i Un G 23809 to Un G23936 2 a Acyclic 5 z communication oO execution command Writes the execution in
342. tem Maintenance Sequence program modification Parameter change in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Change of QJ71PB92V operation mode Recovery from error Powering OFF and then ON Reseting redundant CPU Replacement of QJ71PB92V Return the operation mode of the standby system CPU to Separate mode 1 1 In Debug mode setting in Redundant parameter of GX Developer select Do not start with Debug mode 2 Write the set redundant parameters to the standby system CPU 3 Reset the standby system CPU or power OFF ON the standby system 1 To the next page Figure 9 7 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the Standby System 9 3 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 3 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 26 EAseries 1 Y Turn the maintenance completed system standby system CPU to RUN y Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the standby system QJ71PB92V To the previous page 2 Se Connect GX Developer to the control system CPU j Execute system switching from GX Developer 1 1 Turn ON the manual switching enable flag SM1592 of the control system CPU 2 On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer make a system switching request to the control system CPU Perform maintenance of the other system control system Is the operation mode different between the QJ71PB92Vs in the c
343. th CPU Item Description Check this checkbox to enable the Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory setting in the slave parameters Check the box to change the refresh target device on a per DP Slave basis When Slave Specific Transfer is checked Block Transfer is unchecked Not checked Disables the Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory setting in slave parameters Checked Enables the Addresses in MELSEC CPU Memory setting in slave parameters Slave Specific Transfer Check this checkbox to refresh I O data of all DP Slaves into the same kind of device When Block Transfer is checked Slave Specific Transfer is unchecked Not checked Not refresh I O data of all DP Slaves into the same kind of device Checked Refresh I O data of all DP Slaves into the same kind of device Block Transfer input Set the target device for automatic refresh of input data p For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points Output Set the target device for automatic refresh of output data P For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points Set the target device for automatic refresh of the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Set the target device for automatic refresh of the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Set the automatic refresh target devices of the following areas e Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047
344. th setting The data length unit byte for each station is variable and assigned based on the slave parameter Select Modules set on GX Configurator DP For the DP Slave that has a fixed data length the slave parameter Select Modules setting is ignored b Data length range The maximum data length per module is 244 bytes and the total data length for all DP Slaves can be set up to 8192 bytes When the data length is an odd number of bytes OOH is stored to the final high byte The input data of the next station is assigned starting from the next buffer memory address Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO 6144 1800H 6144 1800H 2nd byte of 1st module 1st byte of 1st module Input data of 1st module 6145 1801H 4th byte of 1st module 3rd byte of 1st module to Input data length 23 bytes 6156 180CH 6157 180DH out data of 2nd module _ 6155 180BH 22nd byte of 1st module 21st byte of 1st module to Input data length 6156 180CH 00H 23rd byte of 1st module 7 bytes 6160 1810H 6157 180Dh 2nd byte of 2nd module 1st byte of 2nd module 6158 180Ex 4th byte of 2nd module 3rd byte of 2nd module is 6159 180FH 6th byte of 2nd module 5th byte of 2nd module io 6160 1810H 00H 7th byte of 2nd module Input data of n th module 10239 27FFH Figure 3 9 Example of Input Data Assignment 1st module 23 bytes 2nd module 7 bytes 4 POINT If a DP Sla
345. the DP Slave parameters and Section 4 2 3 2 i 2 technology monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V z ire PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of Section 4 3 1 i 3 Slaves each DP Slave Z aw n This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and akal Data swap function Section 4 4 oLe received W h When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory this RO s f function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed F BER Data consistency function Section 4 5 Eu e Automatic refresh setting GX Configurator DP Bo e Dedicated instructions BBLKRD BBLKWR This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when E a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is a Output status setting for the E mounted Section 4 6 m case of a CPU stop error Y When the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system I O data exchange with DP w Slaves is continued regardless of the setting until systems A and B go down 2 Temporary slave reservation Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the Section 4 7 lt i function DP Slave station type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Redundant system support When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects
346. the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Before cleaning be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause electrical shocks CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire When using a wireless communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS keep it at least 25cm away from the entire PLC system in all directions Failure to do so may cause a malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module Module installation to or removal from the base unit is limited to 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Exceeding 50 times may cause malfunctions Before handling modules touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Not doing so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of this product treat is as an industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Aug 2005 SH NA 080572ENG A First edition Jun 2006 SH NA 080572ENG B M
347. the module The serial No and function version of the module are printed in the SERIAL section of the rating plate MELSEC G MITSU MODEL Serial No Upper 5 digits Function version Conformed standard wa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Figure 2 9 Rating Plate 2 Checking through GX Developer The following explains how to check the serial No and function version of the module through GX Developer The serial No and function version are displayed on the Product information list or Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer The procedure for checking the serial No and function version on the Product information list screen is shown below Start Procedure Diagnostics System monitor Product inf list Product Information List QO6HCPU QU71LPB92V S2pt 0000 080710000000000 None 5 None gt CSY file creating Figure 2 10 Product Information List Serial No Ver The serial No of the module is displayed in the Serial No column e The function version of the module is displayed in the Ver column 2 13 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries E POINT The serial No shown on the rating plate may not match with the one displayed on Product information list of GX Developer e The serial No on the rating plate indicates the management information of the pr
348. the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module A 3 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring PROFIBUS cables Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module A CAUTION Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Failure to do so may cause a fire failure or malfunctions Be sure to place the PROFIBUS cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cables may be shifted or inadvertently pulled resulting in damages to the module or cables or malfunctions due to poor cable contact When disconnecting the PROFIBUS cable do not pull it by holding the cable part Be sure to hold its connector which is plugged into the module Pulling the cable with it connected to the module may damage the module and or cable or cause malfunctions due to poor contact of the cable A protective film is attached onto the module top to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module when wiring Do not remove
349. the problem E596H E597H E598H E599H E59AH E59BH Acyclic communication is executed to the same DP Slave Verify that the Acyclic communication is completed and E59CH There is no executable resource retry E59DH There is an invalid parameter setting Check the parameter settings and then retry To the next page 9 4 Error Codes 9 19 9 4 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms 10 Z e e I o wW l a O E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries Error codes E59EH to E5A2H Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action Check the PROFIBUS cable wiring status and start completion status of the DP Slave and then retry When Acyclic communications have been continuously The DP Slave is not able to respond executed to the same DP Slave check the execution E59EH Or because of current processing of a Class2 service the intervals and retry DP Slave cannot handle the next service For the start completion status of the DP Slave and the Acyclic communication execution intervals refer to the manual for the DP Slave E59FH No response was received from the DP Slave Check the DP Slave status and retry Any of the following functions are being executed from the Verify that the processing of the following functions is same DP Master to the same DP Slave completed and retry E5A0H
350. the switching target DP Slaves to normal condition The DP Slave status can be confirmed in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 57 Section 3 4 5 1 It is any of all the DP Slaves that are specified in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 Control system Standby system New standby system New control system ai Redundant rele system ae Redundant switchin module cee PB92V 3 module CPU Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 failure Before recovery of the switching target DP Slave an error occurred at another DP Slave New standby system New control system ce Redundant QJ71 No system ene Redundant QJ71 ae SAPPY CPU PB92V QREMIMaMiae modus CPU PB92V Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 failure failure 2 Do not change the initial value of b8 in the Diagnostic information invalid set ting area Un G2080 gt Section 3 4 6 Changing the initial value disables the system switching by a DP Slave 3 System switching by DP Slave is enabled when the value in the Current diagnostic information non notification tim
351. ting execution command i Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area I Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation I Turn OFF the initial setting execution command Writes the initial output data value I O data exchange start processing 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T 7 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING a Program example for control of DP Slaves MELSEC TA eries MO D200 0 DO 0 Input processing pf input data If 1st word b0 Do 1 Input processing of input data 1st word b1 MO D200 0 X30 mov K100 D100 X31 MOV K500 D101 Figure 7 7 Program Example for Control of DP Slaves b Program example for diagnostic information read X1 D217 0 UO KS i a h ss G 23072 1000 K2 X21 _ __ y X22 X1B X1D X1F fH HJ Wp cr ir X2 Y2 _ _ ____ R Y2 Figure 7 8 Program Example for Diagnostic Information Read Writing to output data 1st word Writing to output data 2nd word Reading the diagnostic information 1st module Diagnostic information detection reset request i Diagnostic information area y clear
352. tion error detection reset command SM1518 standby to control X22 Communication error area clear command MO Refresh start request X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word M400 Initial setting execution command X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word Device c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 70 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target D208 to DO to D95 Input data D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status D100 to D216 to M Output data Slave status area Diagnostic information detection D195 D224 D200 to aa PO D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D1000 Diagnostic information read target T 74 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 4 Tracking devices for continuously using the functions in the case of system switching In the I O data exchange program example data in the following devices are tracking transferred a Devices whose data are tracking transferred by I O data exchange programs Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned ON e Start command device by which the Data consistency start request signal YOC is turned ON e Devices that store output data 1 1
353. tion function refer to the following e Single CPU system K gt Section 7 7 e Redundant system K gt Section 7 9 7 4 28 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 8 Redundant system support function When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and standby systems are switched each other to continue communications OVERVIEW 1 Redundant system operation overview When the CPU or QJ71PB92V in the control system detects an error system switching is performed to continue communications QJ71PB92V FDL address 0 QJ71PB92V FDL address 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Control system Standby system Z Error 1 detected Tracking cable a Z O z 9 lee 8 nm E 5 Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 O E 2 DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB Sge QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V Ede Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 ee 4 FDL address 1 4 FDL address 0 23 2 New standby system New control system ora ene ann Executes system 4 switching Z m N aa Tracking cable Continues communication E Bus terminator Bus terminator i DP Slave QU71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB fe a Figure 4 28 Redundant System Operation Overview Er 1 For c
354. to E468H Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E431H Resource error was detected during read processing on the DP Slave side E432H Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E433H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side hekin dat ted bythe DPS E434H There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave side E R IAR EE PPOR Ry TS E AS correctly set or not and retry The service not available for the specified DP Slave was E435H For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave requested E436H Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the DP Slave side E437H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E438H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request E440H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E4414 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V Be Check if the specified write data length is correct and E442H The write data length is incorrect retry i Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E443H Write error response actions E444H The slot number is incorrect Check if the specified slot number is correct and retry E445H The index is incorrect Check if the specified index is correct a
355. tored value 1 to 240 3 3H The read slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 4 4H The read index is stored Stored value 0 to 255 The read data are stored When the read data length is shorter than the length specified in the request format Os are stored in the empty area When the read data length is longer than the length specified in the request format only data of the PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION specified data length are stored g b15 b8 b7 bO 7 HST to 124 7 SA SOAN EEE 5 5H Data 2 Data 1 Lu 6 6H Data 4 Data 3 z to 7 124 7CH Data 240 Data 239 125 7Dh to Empty area g 127 7FH Stored value 0000H 5 O in a ES oz BG 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 17 ee 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries b When failed Table7 17 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 0H An error code is stored gt Section 9 4 3 1 1H 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO n 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7Dx 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00x to 7Ex 0 to 126 2
356. turning ON 1 the bits of the DP Slave currently exchanging I O data ON Data exchange start Y00 OFF request signal PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION ON Slave status area OFF Normal communication detection Figure 3 15 Operation in Slave Status Area Normal communication detection When I O data exchange is normal PARAMETER SETTING When an I O data communication error occurs on a DP Slave the corresponding bit turns OFF 0 and it turns ON 1 again when normal status is restored ON Data exchange start Y00 OFF request signal Slave status area OFF Normal communication detection I O data exchange error occurred PROGRAMMING Restored from I O data exchange error Figure 3 16 Operation in Slave Status Area Normal communication detection When I O data exchange error occurred DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 30 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 2 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 This area stores the reserved or temporary slave reservation setting of each DP Slave Initial value 0000n 0 Normal DP Slave or not configured station 1 Reserved or temporary slave reservation Address DEC HEX 23048 5A08H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 1141 10 9 8 7 6 514 3 2 23049 5A09x 32 31 30 29 28
357. twork ssccsccccoocooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000 2 4 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples cocoocooooooooooooooooooooooooo0o0oo0000000000000000000 5 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only seecccecccccccccccccccccscccsccccccsccccocccoces 2 7 2 3 1 2 3 2 24 Checking the Function Version and Serial NO cecococcococooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 13 PROFIBUS DP network configuration ccoocooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 _ 7 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples coocoocooooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000 8 CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 67 3 1 Performance Specifications 00o0oo0o0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 1 3 2 Function Listesecsoccocoocooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 3 3 3 Input Output Signals to from PLC CPU 0ooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 4 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 Buffer Memory eeeeecceececcccccccccccoccoccceccccccccccccceccoccocococcccccccccccccccsccscocococcoccceccccceccecee 3 17 List of I O signals 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 4 Details of I O SigNalseeeeeeecceccccococcocecccccccoccccccccocococcocecccccccccccccoccococoocooccccocccoscoseese 3 6 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 B
358. ue 0000n CONFIGURATION m fl 2 D 0 Not execute 1 Execute 3 Address DEC HEX b15 to bO 2 2081 821n See below z z bit Description Initial value Reference Section a bO Unused Fixed to 0 0 b1 Unused Fixed to 0 0 UNFREEZE Retention of the actual input data is b2 disabled 0 lt b b3 FREEZE Actual input data is held and read 0 2 UNSYNC Retention of the actual input data is F b4 4 0 G disabled Z Le b5 SYNC Actual output data is written and held 0 b6 Unused Fixed to 0 0 b7 Unused Fixed to 0 0 awd PA oe b8 Executed on DP Slaves in group 1 0 as Lu b9 Executed on DP Slaves in group 2 0 50 5 b10 Executed on DP Slaves in group 3 0 9 E i ti b11 Executed on DP Slaves in group 4 0 OD b12 Executed on DP Slaves in group 5 0 b13 Executed on DP Slaves in group 6 0 o Zz b14 Executed on DP Slaves in group 7 0 E b15 Executed on DP Slaves in group 8 0 re a Figure 3 28 Global Control Area Un G2081 3 0 oO 9 a oO n 6 a Eo D9 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 44 3 4 9 Global control area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries b Setting global control services b5 to b2 The following service combinations are not executable at the same time e SYNC and UNSYNC If both services are attempted concurrently UNSYNC only is enabled e FREEZE and UNFREEZE If both serv
359. uest format Continued Offset Address Description Set Value 8 8H 1 Sets D_Type The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set D_Len The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 9 9H to 127 7FH Empty area Write 0000n Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 23 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 22 Response Format When Normally Completed Offset Address Result 0 0H A response code is stored Stored value A412H 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00H to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H Max LenDataUnit is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 3 3H Features Supported is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Sl
360. uffer memory liSteeeooccccococoococooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 17 Local station information Arca 00 0000cccccccccccccccsc 0c ece sce eceescesccescesces cesses esceescesessceeee 3 21 Operation mode change Arcaqe recccccocococoocooocooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 23 O data exchange Arca 000 0cccc cece ccc cece ccc cce eee 000000000000 0000000000000 0e0 ees esseseeeeeeeeeeeeeece 3 24 A 7 3 4 5 Slave status areae eeeseeseesesseesecsoscoscoecocooccocecesocoocsoscoccoccoccocsocsecsocsoscoesocsoesossess 3 29 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area eeeeseseseseseeseeeeoeosoooosooosococoesececesosococeceococoseoesesssssose 3 36 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area seeeeseeeseseseseceseeseoososoosssosssossesesesoseoeseoee 3 42 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area eeseeseseesssesesesesececececoceccoccecoeooceoosooososooosescseoecesesesesecececessese 3 43 3 4 9 Global Control area e seesseseeseessessessecocsocsocscoecoecocsocssccoccocsoosoecsecoesoossessococcsossesseso 3 44 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area eseeseeesesesesesesesesecececoecoooooosososooscsesecesecoseseceoeosesosssose 3 AG 3 4 11 Alarm ALA 00 000000000000 00e0c0ece eee 0ee000e eee 000e 0000000000000 0000000000000 000000 00000000000000 000000000 00000 3 50 3 4 12 Time control ALEN 000 00000000 000c ccc cee 0e eee 000000 00000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 0000000 see sseeseesecoee 3
361. uit in the sequence program using the communication status information to ensure the system operates safely Input X1 buffer memory 5A20H to 5B19H 23072 to 23321 An erroneous output or malfunction may cause accidents 1 The QJ71PB92V holds the input data before the communication failure 2 When the QJ71PB92V has gone down the output status of each DP Slave is dependent on the QJ71PB92V parameter setting on GX Configurator DP 3 When a DP Slave has gone down the output status of the other DP Slaves is dependent on the QJ71PB92V parameter setting on GX Configurator DP Do not output the use prohibited signal as the output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU Wiring data into the system area or outputting a signal for use prohibited may cause system malfunciton in the PLC DESIGN PRECAUTIONS When a stop error has occurred on a CPU module the communication status varies depending on the error time output mode setting of GX Developer as shown below Note that if the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system it operates as described in 1 regardless of the setting 1 When Error time output mode is set to Hold a Communications with DP Slaves are continued b Input data received from DP Slaves are updated into the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V c For the output data sent from the QJ71PB92V to DP Slaves the values at the time of the CPU module stop error are held 2 When Error
362. unted as number of modules Redundant DP Slave Non redundant DP Slave lt Fa DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 EE Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 A 6 eels Redundant QJ71 i Redundant QU71 SUPP Y GPU PB92V SUPP Y CPU PB92V module module Tracking cable DP Slave FDL address 2 Bus terminator Bus terminator SPECIFICATIONS DP Slave FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 30 J vV DP Slave 29 modules Repeater 1 1 Repeater 1 2 FUNCTIONS Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave rebas DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 N V J DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 8 When Using Redundant and Non Redundant DP Slaves PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION POINT Using repeaters redundant DP Slaves and non redundant ones must be separately connected to different segments PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 12 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG Fl aries 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No This section explains how to check the function version and serial No of the QJ71PB92V 1 Checking the Rating plate on the side of
363. us of each DP Slave 3 4 5 23065 to 23070 System area Use prohibited 5A19x to 5A1Ex 23071 Local station error information This area stores the error information of the 0 R Section 5A1FH area local station QJ71PB92V 3 4 2 In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 23072 to 23321 Diagnostic information area used to store the diagnostic information of the 0 R Section 5A20x to 5B19x for mode 3 error occurred on each DP Slave during 3 4 6 communication 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable To 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list the next page 3 18 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO o Z O q 9 M a 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 19 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued MELSEC TE cries Address i Initial Read Reference Name Description x 5 DEC HEX value Write Section 23322 to 23327 System area Use prohibited 5B1Ax to 5B1Fx In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 23328 to 23454 Extended diagnostic information used to store the extended diagnostic 0 R Section 5B20x to 5B9Ex area for mode 3 information of the error occurred on each DP 3 4 6 Slave during communicat
364. using a dedicated instruction Use of the data consistency function increases the transmission delay time CF Section 3 5 2 QCPUs available when using dedicated instructions For QCPUs supporting the dedicated instruction refer to Section 2 1 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 8 2 BBLKRD Instruction Table8 3 Device Usable in the BBLKRD Instruction gt Usable device Internal device MELSECNET 10 H Special icts Set data System user i function J Constant register Bit i R Ld iE J z O n1 O O _ z0 D O Be no Instruction Execution symbol condition 5 Command 9 BBLKRD _ BBLKRD un nmn m g N Figure 8 3 BBLKRD Instruction Set data Table8 4 Set Data in the BBLKRD Instruction CZ Set data Description Setting range Data type E QJ71PB92V module start I O number 5 Un o a 0 to FEH T Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation BIN 16 bits n1 Start address of reading data Specified device range D Start No of the device to which read data are stored Specified device range Device name guy 5 Ze n2 Number of read data 1 to 4096 word BIN 16 bits ae T n S aos F Oe Function ean v n This instruction allows data reading from the buffer memory of a specified module with data consistency ensured z z Error m An operation error occurs in
365. ut of the range icp E201H No FDL address has been specified o E202H The specified FDL address belongs to the local station 2 QJ71PB92V M Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry E203H The specified FDL address belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E204H No extended diagnostic information is found in the specified FDL address is a z 9 4 Error Codes 9 11 9 4 1 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries Error codes E300H to E3A1H 9 4 2 Error codes E3004 to E3FFu Error codes generated when switching operation mode Table9 5 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error Code Error Description Action 7 foes Check if the operation mode set in Operation mode E300H The specified operation mode is invalid change request area is correct and retry After writing parameters change the mode to E301H Parameters have not been written to the module ee Communication mode mode 3 After completing the following processing change the operation mode Acquisition of extended diagnostic information E302H Unable to change the operation mode in the current Global control function operation status e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition FDT DTM technology Time control function E303H Failed to write to the flash ROM Initialize the flash ROM Or failed to initialize t
366. ve which is specified in the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 POINT 1 Set values into the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored OVERVIEW 2 With a communication error identified in a system switching target DP Slave after system switching no system switching is performed even if a communication error occurs in another DP Slave To perform system switching again restore all of the switching target DP CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 Slaves to normal condition The DP Slave status can be confirmed in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 gt Section 3 4 5 2 Z O lt iS u 3 w a 2 1 Itis any of all the DP Slaves that are specified in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 Control system Standby system New standby system New control system Redundant Executes system Redundant QJ71 CPU PB92V Switching FUNCTIONS Tracking cable Mm DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 Bus terminator PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION failure Before
367. ve with no input data is assigned its space in the input data area is taken over by the next station with input data as shown below Each DP Slave setting Assignment result in Input data area of QJ71PB92V 1st module Input data Set e144r1B00 H Input data of 1st module 2nd module Input data None Input data of 3rd module 3rd module Input data Set Input data of 5th module 4th module Input data Set Data length 0 Because of no input data setting for 2nd and 4th modules no area is assigned for them 5th module Input data Set 3 25 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 output data to DP Slaves are set a Data length setting The data length unit byte of each station is variable and assigned based on the slave parameter Select Modules set on GX Configurator DP For the DP Slave that has a fixed data length the slave parameter Select Modules setting is ignored b Data length range eLS eG Q series The maximum data length per module is 244 bytes and the total data length for all DP Slaves can be set up to 8192 bytes When the data length is an odd number of bytes the final high byte is occupied Set 00H to the final high byte The output data of the next station is assigned starting fr
368. xecute the READ and or WRITE services To end the acyclic communication disconnect the line from the DP Slave by the ABORT service When executing a Class2 service to a DP Slave that is exchanging I O data verify in advance that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 When executing a Class2 service to a DP Slave that is not exchanging I O data verify in advance that the DP Slave has been completely activated For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave Table4 5 Available Services Class2 services Service Name Description INITIATE Class2_SERVICE Establishes a line connection with any specified DP Slave ABORT Class2_SERVICE Disconnects a line connection from any specified DP Slave Reads data from a DP Slave connected to the line by the INITIATE 2 READ Class2_SERVICE service Writes data to a DP Slave connected to the line by the INITIATE 2 WRITE Class2_SERVICE service 2 The data that can be read or written by READ or WRITE services vary depending on the DP Slave to be used For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE cries 2 Executing acyclic communication Execute the acyclic communication by the following procedure OVERVIEW a Write the request instruction to be executed to the
369. y R W Read write executable 2 The initial value varies depending on the QCPU installed with the QJ71PB92V or the parameter 37 gt Section 3 4 14 To the next page 3 17 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued Description Initial eG el series Reference 1p emt 129 value Section 2265 to 2271 System area Use prohibited 8D9H to 8DF 2272 P f Section 8E0x Current bus cycle time This area stores the current bus cycle time 0 R 3 48 H i 2273 This area stores the minimum value of the bus Section Min bus cycle time 0 R 8E1n cycle time 3 4 8 2274 This area stores the maximum value of the bus Section Max bus cycle time 0 R 8E2n cycle time 3 4 8 2275 to 6143 System area Use prohibited 8E3x to 17FFn In Communication mode mode 3 this area is n 6144 to 10239 Section Input data area for mode 3 used to store the input data received from each 0 R 18004 to 27FFH DP Slave 3 4 4 Slave 10240 to 14335 System area Use prohibited 28004 to 37FFH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is N 14336 to 18431 Section Output data area for mode 3 used to set the output data to be sent to each 0 R W 38004 to 47FFH DP Slave 3 4 4 Slave 18432 to 22527 vias System area Use prohibited
370. y to exchange I O data 4 exchange is started DP Slave 2 While I O data are exchanged Check the DP Slave status and communication line The parameter No of I O bytes received from the Status 1 b10 Check the DP Slave parameters DP Slave DP Master does not match that of the DP Slave b11 There is some extended diagnostic information Check the DP Slave status DP Master Check if the DP Slave supports the global control The function requested by the DP Master is not b12 function or not DP Slave supported TENE Verify the DP Slave specifications b13 Illegal response from DP Slave Check the DP Slave or network status DP Master b14 Illegal parameter s sent from the DP Master Check the parameters DP Slave Check if more than one DP Master are b15 Controlled by another DP Master communicating with the same DP Slave DP Master Check the parameters 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 40 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Zz O lt Q u w a Oo FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 5 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 This area stores the latest extended diagnostic information occurred during communication Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO The FDL address of the DP Slave
371. ystem A and the one in system B Ei Q If the mode is different between them a malfunction may occur in system Oo switching no 6 z O D no 6 aus She eas aos WZ 1 zZ im o pe mi w PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 5 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Cel ries 6 3 Master Parameters Set the QJ71PB92V s transmission speed FDL address and other parameters 1 Start procedure a Right click on the DP Master graphic Modify Settings Right click on the graphic Figure 6 2 Master Settings Screen Start Procedure 2 Setting items Master Settings Module OAPI n Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION il r Name Baadrate FOL address Error action flag Head address on PLE PROFIBUS Master i5Mbps gt fo f 125 oo Ox DAF l Goto Cleay State Min slave interval il 1 69535 Polling timeout s0 1 B5535 Data control time fico T 65535 IT Watchdog i ahdini T fi BSL IV Autom Refresh Consistency Watchdog for time syne Cancel Default Bus Param Figure 6 3 Master Settings Screen Table6 3 Master Parameter Setting Items Item Description Nene Set the name of the DP Master Setting range Up to 17 alphanumeric characters Set the transmission speed of the PROFIBUS DP Baudrate Setting range 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps Default 1 5 Mbps FDL address Set the FDL addr
372. z aye i EB Figure 7 34 I O Data Exchange Parameter Setting Example GX Developer Se 2 wy W w oq TE 1 For tracking devices used for continuing respective functions of the QJ71PB92V refer to 4 in this D fi section and sections 7 9 2 to 7 9 7 Pare For details on the tracking settings refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 73 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 3 Device assignments in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 68 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Data exchange start completed signal Data exchange start request signal X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal X1B Communication READY signal X1D Module READY signal X1F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 69 List of User Devices I O data exchange start command SM402 ON for 1 scan only after RUN ae N ON for 1 scan only after switching system from X21 Communica

PROFIBUS-DP Master Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents